JP7132587B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional gaming machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail judgment is performed with a predetermined probability of a big hit, symbols are variably displayed, and a game effect is performed to show the result of the win/fail determination along with the variably displayed symbols. , there is a jackpot game in which a jackpot is opened when a jackpot is won. In addition, there is a gaming machine that executes a predetermined game effect in conjunction with the variable display of symbols, notifies the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit, and enhances the game interest (for example, patent document 1).

JP 2015-66055

In addition, the gaming machine of Cited Document 1 is provided with a game effect using a timer as a game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of symbols. According to such a game effect using a timer, the display mode of the game effect changes at a time predetermined by the timer effect regardless of the determination result. As a result, the game performances to be executed diversify (change) as the game time elapses due to the timer performance, and even when the same game machine is played for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game as much as possible. can be done. However, depending on the game effect executed by the timer effect and the time (time) set by the timer effect, the game interest may be increased or the game interest may be decreased. For example, if the time set by the timer effect is long or short, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine having various game effects, which executes unexpected game effects and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
As the game performance,
A count effect that displays a predetermined initial value and counts up to a specific value by changing the initial value ;
a specific game effect that is executed in parallel with the count effect until the value displayed in the count effect reaches the specific value, and performs a gauge accumulation effect;
an effect different from the specific game effect, and a purpose effect of performing a predetermined effect based on the gauge amount acquired in the specific game effect after the specific game effect ends ,
When the amount of the gauge accumulated in the specific game effect is large, the possibility of executing the effect indicating the execution of the special game in the purpose effect is higher than in the case where the amount is small,
As the count effect, there are a effect of stopping counting at a value different from the specific value and restarting counting after a predetermined time elapses, and an effect of not restarting counting after stopping counting at a value different from the specific value. ,
In the count effect, when the count is restarted after the count is stopped, the possibility of executing the special game is higher than when the count is not restarted ,
In the count effect, progressing the specific game effect while the count is stopped
It is characterized by

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a variety of game presentations, which executes unexpected game presentations and enhances amusement in games.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of the process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). 9 is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart of a first effect mode setting process. 10 is a flowchart of preliminary effect switching processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of a second effect mode setting process. It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. 10 is a flowchart of an announcement effect setting process; It is a flowchart of a third effect mode setting process. . It is a figure which shows an example of preliminary production. It is a figure which shows an example of preliminary production. It is a figure which shows an example of preliminary production. It is a figure which shows an example of preliminary production. It is a figure which shows an example of an advance notice production. It is a table|surface which shows the kind of notice production. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of another aspect of the advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of another aspect of the advance notice effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific mode of Example 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a forewarning effect of Example 2; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a first execution pattern of the count announcement effect of Example 3; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a second execution pattern of the count announcement effect of Example 3; It is a figure which shows the 1st execution pattern of preliminary production|presentation of Example 3, and specific production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 1st execution pattern of preliminary production|presentation of Example 3, and specific production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 1st execution pattern of preliminary production|presentation of Example 3, and specific production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd execution pattern of specific production|presentation of Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 2nd execution pattern of the preliminary performance of Example 3, and the 3rd execution pattern of preliminary performance and specific performance of Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 3rd execution pattern of preliminary production|presentation of Example 3, and specific production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 4th execution pattern of specific production|presentation of Example 3. FIG.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following embodiments, the game medium used in the game is a game ball, and a pachinko game machine (pinball game machine) capable of proceeding with the game by shooting the game ball toward the game board surface. An application of the invention will be described. Specifically, when the special symbols are variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and when the special symbols variably displayed are stopped and the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the player receives a predetermined amount. A so-called “type 1” pachinko machine capable of executing a jackpot game (special game) in which a game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be awarded will be described as an example.

In the following description, simply the front side (front) means the front side (the side where the player is positioned during a game) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and simply the rear side (rear) means the game machine. It is the rear side when the aircraft is viewed from the front. In addition, simply the upper side (above), the lower side (downward), the left side (left side), and the right side (right side) refer to the respective directions of up, down, left, and right when the game machine is viewed from the front. , for example, refer to upper, lower, left, and right sides in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52 and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and configured to be openable and closable.

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also referred to simply as a "production button 63"), a decorative frame lamp 66 capable of emitting various lights depending on the game situation, and various sounds (sound effects) depending on the game situation. A speaker 67 and the like are also provided.

The effect button 63 functions as input means for inputting by the player, and the effect button to be used can be properly used according to the type of game effect. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. Incidentally, the structure of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and it is sufficient if the player can input. (For example, a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good too. Moreover, the production button may be one that performs a production operation such as protruding upward or frontward or vibrating (movable production operation means).

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded in the game area 3, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. - 特許庁The ball return preventing piece 6 is for preventing the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) capable of emitting various lights according to the game situation.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7, which is one aspect of effect display means, is provided. The image display device 7 of this embodiment consists of a liquid crystal display device, and the display screen 7a has a production pattern display area 7b in which production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (also referred to simply as "production patterns 8") are displayed. (also referred to as a “drawing pattern display portion”) and a background display area 7c in which a background image forming the background of the display screen 7a is displayed. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. As a mode of variable display, for example, there is a mode of scrolling up and down, left and right, oblique directions, etc. In this embodiment, in principle, scroll display is performed in the up and down direction. The effect pattern display area 7b is composed of, for example, three pattern display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The positions of the left, middle, and right pattern display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (the performance pattern display area 7b). .

The production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of this embodiment are each composed of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9". Displayed on a first special symbol display device 41a (also referred to as a "first special symbol display unit"), which will be described later, by a combination (stop display mode) of left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. The display result of the variable display of the first special symbol to be displayed, and the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display unit"), that is, The result of the special symbol suitability determination (simply referred to as "appropriateness determination") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In this embodiment, the stop order of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are displayed in a variable manner is, in principle, "left→right→middle". Incidentally, any one of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the normal design is "General", the special design is "Special", the first special design is "Special 1", "1st special", the second special is "Special 2", "2nd special" There is a thing called.

For example, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the performance symbols with the same three-digit number such as ``777'' (also referred to as ``hit performance symbols''). In addition, in the event of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the production pattern with a preset chance pattern such as "135" or a dedicated pattern such as "3*3" (also called "small hit production pattern"). is. In addition, in the case of being out, at least one of the three patterns such as "637" and "373" is different. It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped.

Here, among the stop display modes of the production pattern, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit (in this embodiment, double eyes) is referred to as "jackpot mode", "specific display result", etc. Therefore, the stop display mode (in this embodiment, loose eyes) corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol suitability determination is "off" may be called "off mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a small hit may be referred to as a "small hit mode" or a "predetermined display result".

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), the winning game production executed in conjunction with the winning game, the customer waiting A demo will be displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to production patterns such as numbers, various production images other than production patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display portion) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later. , and a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display section) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect suspension and the second effect suspension, the number of memories of the first special figure suspension and the second The stored number of the second special figure reservation displayed on the special figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 of the present embodiment, the effect suspension corresponding to the currently fluctuating special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), that is, the digested special symbol suspension A variable suspension display area 9e for displaying the corresponding effect suspension (first effect suspension 9a or second effect suspension 9b) is provided (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left-handed hitting display area 70c (left-handed hitting instruction image display section) for displaying a left-handed hitting instruction image 70 described later and a right-handed hitting instruction (described later) are displayed depending on the game state. A right-hand hitting display area 71c (right-hand hitting instruction image display portion) for displaying an image 71 is provided. The left-hand shot instruction image 70 and the right-hand shot instruction image 71 are also collectively referred to as "fire instruction images".

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect pattern display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. The decorative member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it is visible. As a result, the player's sense of anticipation for winning is heightened.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success/failure determination.

Below the first starter opening 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starter opening") having a variable second starter opening 21 that changes the ease with which a game ball enters is provided. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol suitability determination ) is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stop-displayed based on the result of the win/loss determination.

The variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. In other words, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting port 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening/closing operation). This movable member 23 is driven by a second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and disables game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. . In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 having a first big winning hole 30 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entry hole") is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 and opens and closes the first big prize winning port 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 can enter a ball-unable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot be entered and a ball-enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. can be changed to

In addition, above the first big winning hole 30 in the game area 3 and in the lower right part of the center decorative body 10, a second big winning hole 35 (also referred to as "second variable ball entrance") is provided. A big winning device 36 is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member (wing member) 37 and opens and closes the second big prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize winning solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 can enter a ball-unable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot be entered and a ball-enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. can be changed to

The second big winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 can pass. In the pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state, which will be described later, is generated based on detection that at least one of the game balls entering the second big prize hole 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variable operation opening. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening 35 (second big winning device 36) having the specific area 39 (V area) as such a variable probability operating opening is also called "V attacker". It should be noted that the high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a normal determination is made as to whether or not the second start port 21 is to be opened. While the symbol suitability determination is executed, the normal symbols are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed based on the results of the normal symbol suitability determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Furthermore, a plurality of general prize winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . In this embodiment, there are four general prize-winning ports 27, three of which are left general prize-winning ports provided to the left of the first starting port 20, and one to the right of the first big prize-winning port 30. It is the right general winning entrance provided in the direction. The first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, and the general winning hole 27 are the ball entry holes that trigger the payout of prize balls. When a game ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out from each ball entrance. Specifically, the number of prize balls in the first start hole 20 is "4", the number of prize balls in the second start hole 21 is "2", and the number of prize balls in the first big prize hole 20 and the second big prize hole 35 is "15", and the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 27 is "10".

A game in which a plurality of entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, general winning opening 27 and gate 28) are arranged in this way The area 3 can be divided into a left game area 3A (first area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B (second area) on the right side. Shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting", and shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". . Here, among the plurality of ball entrances, the first starting opening 20 and the three left general winning openings 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left game area 3A of the game areas 3 can enter. The second starting port 21, the first big prize winning port 30, the second big winning prize port 35, the right general prize winning port 27 and the gate 28 are where game balls flowing down the right game area 3B of the game areas 3 enter. It is set up so that it is possible. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the game is started, in principle, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking to the left. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the win/loss determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the first winning hole 30 are hit to the right. The goal is to enter the ball into the second prize-winning hole 35 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) that variably displays and statically displays the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that variably displays and statically displays the second special symbol. A display device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably display and stop display normal symbols are included. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol ( The second special figure reservation indicator 43b that displays the number of memories of the second special figure reservation) and the normal figure reservation indicator 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation reservation (normal figure reservation) of the normal design indicator 42 include. Further, the main display 40 includes a win indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination is a hit, and the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, hitting right. and a firing direction indicator 47 that indicates whether the ball should be shot or left-handed. The display of these various displays included in the main display 40 is controlled by a main control section which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol". Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as "special symbol display unit 41". Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display unit 43".

In the special symbol display unit 41, after the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the stopped and displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery (special design success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information), that is, the mode of the stop display of the special pattern (the display result of the variable display of the special pattern) is a hit mode such as a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern. In this case, a special game (big win game, small win game) is performed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbols stopped and displayed. The pattern of opening the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. In this embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, four types of jackpots, namely, "15R 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "5R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 4th jackpot", and 1st Small hits are provided (see FIGS. 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the first special symbol display 41a can take display modes corresponding to the big hits and the small hits. For example, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the first jackpot (15R jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R first jackpot pattern). Also, when the second big win (15R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R second big win pattern). Also, when the third big win (15R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R third big win pattern). Also, when the fourth big win (2R big win) is achieved, four LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R fourth big win pattern). Further, when the first small hit is achieved, four LEDs of "mnop" are lit and the rest are turned off (small hit pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing pattern).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. In this embodiment, two types of big hits, "15R 5th big win" and "15R 6th big win" are provided as a result of the second special symbol suitability determination (see FIG. 8), and the second special symbol display. The LED of the device 41b can take a display form corresponding to each of the big hits. For example, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the fifth big hit (15R big win), three LEDs of "abd" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R fifth big win pattern). Also, when the 6th jackpot (15R jackpot) is achieved, the three LEDs of "abc" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R 6th jackpot pattern). Further, when the second small hit is achieved, the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (second small prize pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing symbol).

It should be noted that the special symbol stop display mode (stop symbol) is not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. Thus, each LED can be turned on.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information ("acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether or not a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball is entered into the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation (first acquisition information) in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), and to the second start port 21 If it is a ball entry, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure reservation (second acquisition information). The number of special figure suspension (acquisition information) that can be stored in each special figure suspension storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is "4" respectively. These first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means".

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage part is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbols Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entered ball, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). is "1", the "u" LED is extinguished and the "v" LED is lit in red, such as "u v". v□”, the “u” LED is lit in red and the “v” LED is turned off. It is possible to set the display mode to light up in red, and to light up both LEDs in green, such as "u▲v▲" when the number of reservations is "4 (upper limit number)".

In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the number of second special figure reservations is displayed. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). "1" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the results of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 are displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination by its lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, the out normal symbol is displayed such that only the LED of "t" lights up, such as "s□t■". It should be noted that the normal design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed over a predetermined variable time. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a normal symbol is right or wrong is acquired based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal map reservation in a normal map reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. The number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is "4". The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right of normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of normal pattern reservations stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is displayed on the general pattern reservation display 44 . Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of normal map reservations. be. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). is "1", the LED of "q" is extinguished and the LED of "r" is lit in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations "2" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also known as a "main control unit", which performs control related to game progress and game profits, such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, game state transition, etc.). section"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control section", also referred to as a "production control section") that controls the performance to be executed as the game progresses, payout control that controls the payout of game balls Board 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), image display device 7 and effect display device 102, effect first special figure reservation display device 103a and effect second special figure reservation display device 103b image control board for performing display control 100 (image control unit) and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear surface side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case is a main control board housing case. is provided with a storage case for image control boards, etc., in which the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 are stored, and a sub control board storage case, in which the sub control board 90 is stored, is provided on the storage case for the image control boards, etc. A case is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit (first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit) and normal figure reservation storage unit. In addition, at a predetermined address of the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), storage areas for use in various flags and various counters are secured.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the non-specific sensor. A region sensor 49a and a general winning hole sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also called "game ball detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39 a is provided in the specific area 39 within the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 . The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in a non-specific area (not shown) in the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 passes through the non-specific area. A ball (that is, a game ball that did not pass through the specific area 39) is detected. The general winning hole sensor 27a is provided in each general winning hole 27 and detects a game ball entering the general winning hole 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33 and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 .

Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a general symbol. A holding display 44, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a shooting direction display 47 and a winning display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like). (which enables ball rental based on the information received) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 rotates the firing handle 60. Detect quantity. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 . In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously shot by the shooting device 112 by driving the shooting motor 113 is about 100 in one minute.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. . The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. In addition, at a predetermined address of the RAM (effect control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), a storage area for use in various flags and various counters is secured.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . The sub-control board 90 (sub-control section), the image control board 100 (image control section), the sound control board 106 (sound control section), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control section) display according to the game situation. It functions as an effect control means (effect execution means) that controls various effects such as effects, sound effects, and lamp effects (light effects) to be executed by devices and members for corresponding effects (effect means). .

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Display control of the device 7, the production display 102, the production first special figure suspension display 103a, and the production second suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production patterns, pending patterns, etc.). and image data such as background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display device 102 consists of two LEDs, and performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect pattern 8. Stop display in a display mode showing the display result (result of special symbol propriety determination). Moreover, the production 1st special figure suspension display 103a and the production 2nd suspension display 103b are similarly made up of two LEDs. And, by lighting/extinguishing or combination of colors of the two LEDs, the production first special figure suspension display 103a is displayed by the number of reservations displayed in the first production suspension display area 9c and the first special figure suspension display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of reservations as the number of reservations made. In addition, the second special figure pending display 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. controlled. This is done by displaying the character design on substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance design display section), or by operating the movable decorative member 14 to cover the performance design display area 7b (performance design display section) of the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible that part or all of the effect pattern, the first effect pending display part, or the second effect pending display part cannot be visually recognized, so such a display is provided. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Also, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the image control microcomputer 101 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 .

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . As described above, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 (behind the decorative member 13). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch. Incidentally, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are collectively referred to simply as "effect button detection switch".

Next, the control (determining means) relating to the winning/losing determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol suitability determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". When the result of the special symbol propriety determination is "big hit", the "big hit pattern" is stop-displayed on the special pattern display part 41, and when the result is "small win", the special pattern display part 41 is stop-displayed on the "small win pattern". , "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops displaying the "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbols stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "2R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot" and There is a "15R 6th jackpot". In the "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning hole 35 in a manner that allows (easy) passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 (V passage). The round aiming at passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is also called "V round" or "chance round".

"15R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot" have 15 openings (number of rounds) of the big winning gate (first big winning gate 30 or second big winning gate 35). However, the opening times of the first and second rounds, which are the V rounds, are extremely short (instantaneous opening and closing), and it is difficult (or even impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. is. That is, these big wins can be said to be big wins that do not open the second big winning hole 35 in a manner that the game ball can (easily) pass through the specific area 39 .

"2R 4th jackpot" is that the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st and 2nd rounds are V rounds. It is a big hit that opens the second big winning hole 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass to the specific area 39 immediately. However, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds even in the first round and the second round combined, the probability of the game ball passing through the specific area is lower than in the 15R first big win. It's becoming

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big win game, the game state after the big win game is completed is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is the 15R first big hit or the 15R fifth big hit, V in the first and second rounds is performed in a manner in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is extremely high. Since the round is executed, the game state after the big win game can be shifted to the high probability state by allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the big win game. In addition, when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is the 2R fourth big hit, one round is performed in a mode in which there is a possibility that the game ball may pass through the specific area 39 although it is not as good as the 15R first big hit or the 15R fifth big hit. Since the second and second V rounds are executed, if the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 during execution of the big win game, the game state after the big win game can be shifted to a high probability state. .

On the other hand, when the result of special symbol suitability determination is 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot, opening times of V rounds of 1st round and 2nd round are 0.00. Since it is 1 second, it is very difficult to let the game ball enter the second big winning hole. It becomes substantially impossible), and the game state after the jackpot game is very likely to be a normal state (low probability state) described later (it can be said to be a low probability state).

On the other hand, a small win (first small win, second small win) is a win to open a big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big win. That is, in the small hit, the second big winning hole 35 is opened in a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 . However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during execution of the small-hit game, the game state after execution of the small-hit game does not change from before execution of the small-hit game. Therefore, if the game state before execution of the small-hit game is a normal state (low probability state), the game state after execution of the small-hit game will also be in a normal state. From the player's point of view, the 2R fourth big win and the small win cannot be distinguished even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is the "2R fourth big win" or the "minor win". Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game (during the jackpot game) as the 2R fourth jackpot, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Have difficulty. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game as a small win (during the small win game), that alone determines whether the subsequent game state remains the normal state or shifts to the high probability state. It is difficult to recognize. As a result, the player can proceed with the game with expectation that a high probability state may be reached in the case of a small win or in the case of a 2R fourth big win, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. . It should be noted that, in the case of a small win, the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings.

FIG. 6 shows the opening patterns of the big winning openings when each big win and small win are achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. That is, when it becomes the 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the 15R fifth big hit (15R on the second special symbol display 41b) When the fifth big winning pattern is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened for maximum 28 seconds in 1R to 2R, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened for maximum 28 seconds in 3R to 15R. In this hit, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 28 seconds respectively, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the round (during the V round) is extremely high. It has become.

Also, when it becomes a 15R second big hit (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), when it becomes a 15R third big hit (on the first special symbol display 41a When the 15R 3rd jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed) and when it becomes the 15R 6th jackpot (when the 15R 6th jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 41b), in 1R to 2R The second big winning hole 35 is opened for 0.1 second at maximum, and the first big winning hole 30 is opened for 28 seconds at maximum from 3R to 15R. In this hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 0.1 seconds at the maximum, which is extremely short time (momentary opening and closing), so that the game can be played during the round (during the V round). It is almost impossible for the sphere to pass through the specific area 39 .

Thus, in this embodiment, compared with the opening patterns for the 15R second, third and sixth jackpots and the opening patterns for the 15R first and fifth jackpots, the first round and the second round (V round) are different in opening mode. In the 15R 1st and 5th jackpots, the second big prize-winning port 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the 1st and 2nd rounds, so that in the V-round, troubles such as ball clogging and game ball shooting system do not occur. As long as the game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 almost certainly, and passes through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R 2nd, 3rd and 6th jackpots, the second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 35 . Therefore, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot games related to the 15R 2nd, 3rd and 6th jackpots is considerably lower than that of the 15R 1st and 5th jackpots. It can be said that it is practically impassable.

A jackpot in which the V round is executed in a manner in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 (V passing possibility) is extremely high is also called a "V passing scheduled big win", and the V passing possibility is extremely low. A jackpot in which V rounds are executed in the mode is also referred to as a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R fourth big win is achieved (when the 2R fourth big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning openings from 1R to 2R 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. In this hit, the maximum total opening time of the second big winning hole 35 for the 1st round and the 2nd round is 1.8 seconds. It is possible to pass through the specific area 39 . In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds, so if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds, , It is fully possible to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 and aim for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 . However, in the 2R 4th jackpot, the total opening time of the 2nd jackpot is as short as 1.8 seconds, so many prize balls (gaming profits) cannot be expected as in the other 15R jackpots. In other words, it is a jackpot in which almost no prize balls can be obtained as compared with other jackpots.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a), when it becomes the second small hit (when the second special symbol display device 41b When the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big win. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to let the game ball enter the second big winning hole 35 and pass through the specific area 39. there is However, as described above, even if there is passage to the specific area 39 in the small winning game, there is no change in the game state before and after the small winning game. Also, in the small winning game, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, many winning balls cannot be expected like the 2R fourth big winning. In other words, the small hit has almost no benefits for the player in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball (only the prize ball by entering the ball).

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easily pass through) (15th first jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot), is a second opening pattern that makes it difficult (impossible to pass) through the specific area 39 (15R second jackpot, 15R third jackpot, 15R sixth jackpot), and the first opening that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area It can have a third open pattern (2R fourth jackpot) with a lower passability than the pattern. In addition, as an opening pattern for a small hit, there is a fourth opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if it passes through. can do. As another aspect, this fourth open pattern may be an open pattern that cannot pass through the specific area 39 .

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special pattern (special drawing 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, 30% for the 15R third jackpot, and 30% for the 2Rth jackpot. 4 jackpots are 10% (see the column of random numbers for jackpot type determination in FIG. 6). On the other hand, the big hits in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 80% for the 5th big hit on the 15R and 20% for the 6th big hit on the 15R. column). This distribution probability can be said to represent the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, that is, the probability of being in a high probability state. It can be said that it represents the probability of becoming

That is, with respect to the probability of becoming a high probability state, if the success judgment (first special symbol success judgment) based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 results in a big hit, the probability is at least 40%. Including the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the 2R fourth jackpot, the probability is 50%. On the other hand, if the winning judgment (second special symbol winning judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 results in a big hit, the probability is 80%.

In addition, regarding the probability of becoming a high base state, if the game state (low base state) in which the opening extension function is not activated and the first special symbol success/failure determination results in a big hit, the probability is 60%. The probability is 70% including the 2R fourth jackpot when the first special symbol propriety determination results in a jackpot in the high base state. On the other hand, when the second special symbol propriety determination results in a big hit, the probability is 100%. When a big win is achieved in the second special symbol suitability determination, the 2R big win that can occur when the first special symbol suitability determination results in a big win does not occur, and the 15R big win is always achieved.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, rather than becoming a big hit in the first special symbol propriety determination (first special symbol jackpot lottery) performed when the game ball enters the first start port 20, In the second special symbol success/failure determination (second special symbol big hit lottery) performed by the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the big hit is compared to the case of the first special symbol success/failure determination. , the probability of being in a high probability state, the probability of being in a high base state, and the possibility of winning prize balls for 15R are increased. In other words, it is set so that the possibility of winning a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination is more advantageous to the player than the case of a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination. There is a high possibility that variably displaying the second special symbol works more favorably for the player than variably displaying the first special symbol. Therefore, the player expects the ball to enter the second starting hole 21 and plays the game. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function (high base state) in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 increases. Note that the distribution probability described above is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of game characteristics, specifications, and the like.

Also, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol is superior to the first special symbol, if both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executable, that is, , If both the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation are "1" or more, the variation display of the second special symbol (digestion of the second special symbol reservation) is changed to the first special symbol variation display (second 1 digestion of special figure reservation) will be given priority. As a result, the high base state in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 increases, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol increases, so it can be said that the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. In spite of this, the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state hinders the player's ability to play the game in the advantageous state (high base state). Since the variable display of the first special symbol may work more disadvantageously than the variable display of the second special symbol, it can be said that the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state is not desirable for the player.

Here, as the mode of the stop display of the special symbols, the big winning symbol is also called "specific display result", the small winning symbol is also called "predetermined display result", and the off symbol is called "predetermined mode" or " Also referred to as “non-specific display result”. In addition, the jackpot pattern (15R 3rd jackpot pattern, 2R 4th jackpot pattern in low base state) that does not trigger the setting of the high base state is also called "first specific display result", and is the trigger for setting the high base state. (15R 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th jackpot patterns, 2R 4th jackpot pattern in high base state) is also called "second specific display result". In addition, as a game state when the special symbols are variably displayed, the game state (low base state) in which the open extension function does not operate is also called a "first game state", and the game state in which the open extension function operates (high base state) state) is also referred to as a "second game state".

In this pachinko game machine 1, whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is determined based on a ``random number for judging the success of a special symbol (also referred to as ``information for judging success of a special symbol''). The determination of the type of is performed based on "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for design determination" and "information for design determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes "variation pattern random number (also referred to as “fluctuation pattern information”). The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Random numbers obtained based on passing through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery), and takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states depending on combinations of the probability variation function for special symbols, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the open extension function in the operating state or non-operating state. ing. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "normal state (also referred to as "low probability state"). ”. In the high-probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol propriety determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the success/failure determination is performed using the hit determination table for the normal state, and in the high-probability state, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number determined as the big hit is larger than the normal state. The decision table is used to determine whether or not the game is successful (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability of the display result of the special symbol variation display becoming a big win (a stopped symbol becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9) . As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry ball (an entry ball that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) to the starting port is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in the time-saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in normal symbol propriety determination is higher than the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol per determination table used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol per determination table, normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) (See FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function for normal symbols is activated, the probability that the display result of variable display of normal symbols is a hit (a stopped symbol becomes a normal winning symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the opening frequency of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is higher than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, when the result of the normal design propriety determination is hit in the non-time saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) performs 0.2 second opening operation once, and the time saving state When the result of the normal symbol propriety determination is hit, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs an opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the circumstances where the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating As a result, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is also referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is also referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls in your hand (holding balls).

A high base state (high frequency state) may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22, than when the function is not in operation It is sufficient that the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 15R first and fifth jackpots is special if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It becomes the high probability state of the design, the time saving state of the special design, and the high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is performed for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game when the 15R second and sixth jackpots are won is the normal state of the special symbol because it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Then, in addition to this, it becomes a special symbol time saving state and high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "low certainty high base state". In the low-probability-high base state, a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) of the special symbol variation display is performed, or a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) of the special symbol variation display is performed before the big hit. is won and a special game (jackpot game) relating to the jackpot is executed. In addition, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R second and sixth big hits, the game state after the big hit game is "high certainty". high base state”. Also, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the 15R 1st and 5th jackpot games, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be " Low definite height base state”.

In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 15R third jackpot is a normal state with special symbols because the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game is extremely low. In addition to the special symbol non-time saving state and low base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability low base state". The low-probability-low base state is a basic game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, an initial game state. In addition, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the 15R third jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game is finished will be "high certainty" described later. low base state”.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game when the 2R fourth jackpot is won is a high probability of special symbols if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It becomes a non-time saving state and low base state of the state and special pattern (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability low base state". The high-probability-low base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

This high-probability-low base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-probability state. That is, the high-probability-low base state is a so-called "latent probability variable state (also referred to as "probability non-announced state")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability-high base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. In other words, the high probability high base state is the so-called "variable probability gaming state".

In addition, in the high base state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 2R fourth jackpot is "high probability and high base state" if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. becomes (see FIG. 6). That is, the time-saving function of the special symbols and the base state are the same as before the execution of the big hit game.

In a high-base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, the game can be advantageously progressed by making the game ball enter the right game area 3B by hitting to the right. In the high base state, the second starting hole 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting hole 21 than into the first starting hole 20. because Therefore, in the high base state, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the judgment of normal symbol propriety, by hitting right to enter the game ball to the second start port 21, rather than hitting left. Also, you can get a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol suitability determination). In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to inform that the ball should be shot to the right game area.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high-probability-low base state or a low-probability-low base state, the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A by hitting to the left. In the low base state, the second start port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first start port 20 than into the second start port 21. because Therefore, in the low base state, by hitting left to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for judging whether or not the special symbol is correct) than by hitting right. can be done. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area.

Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: lights off, ▪: lights on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

In addition, in this embodiment, the LED display mode of the shooting direction indicator 47 is used for the shooting instruction notification for instructing which of the left game area 3A and the right game area 3B in the game area 3 to shoot the game ball. Not only that, the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) also displays the shooting instruction images (the left-handed instruction image 70 and the right-handed instruction image 71). In general, it can be said that the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is easier for the player to visually recognize and grasp (understand) the display contents than the shooting direction indicator 47 is. Therefore, in general, the player sees the shooting instruction image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and decides which of "left hitting" and "right hitting" should be performed. It is grasped whether the current game state is a ``left-handed game state'' in which a left-handed game is played or a ``right-handed game state'' in which a right-handed game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game state is in the special game state (jackpot game state) or high base state (high probability high base state, low probability low base state), "right hitting" is performed Therefore, the "right-handed game state" refers to a special game state or a high base state. This "right-handed game state" is also referred to as "predetermined game state", "special game state" is also referred to as "first predetermined game state", and "high base state" is referred to as "second predetermined game state". ” is also called.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the low probability low base state in which no small winning game or big winning game is performed as a reference, this low probability low base state is the "normal game state" or It can be regarded as a "normal state", and a game in which special symbols are variably displayed in this state can be regarded as a "normal game".

The jackpot game is a game that can be executed by variably displaying the special symbols and stopping and displaying the jackpot symbols. Since it is an advantageous game that can obtain a large amount of prize balls by entering the game ball into the opening 35), the big win game can be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the big win game is performed. can be regarded as a "special game state".

In addition, although the small winning game is not as good as the big winning game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole (first big winning hole 32, second big winning hole 35). can be said to be a game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Therefore, the small winning game can also be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the small winning game is performed can also be regarded as a "special game state". In addition, in order to distinguish between the special game as a big hit game and the special game as a small winning game, the special game as a small winning game can also be regarded as a "small profit special game".

[Main control main processing]
Next, based on FIGS. 10 to 38, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, status and counter resets. etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed, for example, based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, the second big winning slot sensor 35a, the general winning slot sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Also, when the first starting hole sensor 20a or the second starting hole sensor 21a detects a game ball, a starting ball entry command corresponding to each starting hole is output to the RAM output buffer by the starting ball entering process (S205), which will be described later. memorize to Furthermore, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts).

After the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described start opening sensor detection process (S204), start ball time process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), special figure operation process (S207) , Specific area sensor detection processing (S208), pending ball number processing (S209) and power interruption monitoring processing (S210) are executed. In addition, "other processing" necessary for progressing the game is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) ends. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), and the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO at S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES at S301), the number of normal symbol holding balls (normal pattern holding number, specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal design reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the normal number of reserved design balls (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal design reservation balls out of the normal design reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, and when the game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305). , The number of special figure 2 pending balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, if the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309, and if the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S306), special figures 2 Add 1 to the number of held balls (S307).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S308) it does. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the jackpot type determination random number Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random number value shown in FIG. information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special-figure 2-holding balls out of the second special-figure holding storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S309). When the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is finished, and when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure 1 Whether the number of pending balls (the number of the first special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of the first special pending, provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO at S310), the process is finished, and if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES at S310), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is incremented by "1" (S311).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S312) it does. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 7 (A) numerical value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls out of the first special figure reserved storage unit.

[Starting ball entry process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start entrance sensor detection process (S204) and then the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-up ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (acquired information) is read ( S316). Next, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the obtained random numbers read out, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (special symbol success/failure determination random number) is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big win, the type of the big win is further determined. The processing of this S317 corresponds to prior determination (so-called "reservation look-ahead") performed prior to the validity determination (S1303, S1309) in special figure 2 validity determination processing (S1202) described later.

In addition, the prior determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot determination table for a high probability state, if it is a normal state (low probability state) For example, based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S318, the game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of the preliminary determination by S317, specifically, the information indicating whether the special symbol success/failure determination random number value matches the big hit determination value (hit/failure information) and , Command data including information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), etc. and set the command in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not sent as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) obtained based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be sent.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether it is information related to the big hit, which kind of big hit, and which variation pattern and the like can be identified by the sub-controller 90 . Also, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low probability It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will be achieved when determined by the state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S316 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Random number for type determination) and information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of prior determination Generate command data as a special figure 2 start ball command, can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319) in the same manner as in the processing relating to special figure 2 described above. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S319, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is.

In S320, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S320), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S320), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF in S320, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the process related to the prior determination after S321.

The processing of S321 to S323 is to perform the same processing as the above-described S316 to S318 for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S321), Pre-judgment is performed for the acquired random number value read out (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). It should be noted that the prior determination of S322 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207) described later.

Here, in the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and the judgment of special figure 2 (see FIG. 8 (B)) is likely to be performed. It's becoming Also, in this embodiment, as will be described later, digestion of the special figure 2 reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the special figure 1 reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). there is From this, in this embodiment, pre-determination (special figure 1 pre-determination) related to special figure 1 reservation is performed in a low base state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, special figure 2 reservation Regarding the prior determination (special figure 2 prior determination), it is supposed to be performed regardless of whether it is a low base state or a high base state. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is controlled to a low probability low base state during the jackpot game, but the game ball enters the first start port 20 during the jackpot game Even if the number of FIG. 1 pending balls increases by "1", the processing of S321 to S323 (special figure 1 pre-determination processing) is not performed.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 14 following the starting ball entry game process (S206). In the general pattern operation process (S207), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and if "0" (YES in S501 ), ending this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol suitability determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 30 seconds is selected. After finishing the normal design variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal design random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal design variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal design variation start process, the normal design variation display is started based on the normal design variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). . Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the game state is the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state out of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (hit determination value is " 0” to “239”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, the time saving flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state out of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (hit Based on the judgment value "0", "1"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) is to determine whether it is a hit (per normal figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process is finished. . On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the general pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of normal symbols with the display result (hitting normal symbols or losing normal symbols) according to the determination result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbols are correct is performed (S804), and this processing is performed. Finish.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether it is in the time saving state (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S903). The opening pattern in the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port open counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-saving state (NO in S902), the open pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, an open pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port open counter. Then, following the setting of the open pattern (S903, S906), the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal electric accessary product process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so (YES in S1003), the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed ) (S1006).

Then, following the process of closing the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal pattern per end process to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the normal pattern per end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag per normal pattern is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so The hit end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern hit flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).
[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal pattern per end process to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the normal pattern per end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the normal pattern per end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so per normal pattern The end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern per flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure action processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S207) following the normal figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure operation process (S207), the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. And, if the special figure operation status is "1" (YES in S1101) special symbol standby process (S1102), if the special figure operation status is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103) Special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), if the special symbol operation status is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) special symbol determination process (S1106), special symbol operation status is "4" If (S1101, S1103, S1105 both NO, S1107 YES) special electric auditors processing 1 as a jackpot game (S1108), if the special figure operation status is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105 , All of S1107 are NO), special electric accessary product processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed respectively. It should be noted that the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0" (S1201 ). If the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is in the process of setting the display screen 7a as the standby screen (demonstration screen for customer waiting is being executed) (S1211). When finished and not in process (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more stored random number counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 21 , Toku-zu 2 propriety determination processing (S1202), Toku-zu 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), Toku-zu 2 random number shift processing (S1204), Toku-zu 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the win/loss determination based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a big hit with a large profit for the player than the win/loss determination based on the first special figure reservation (Fig. 8 (B )).

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM (that is, the second special figure reservation corresponding to the first (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the normal state hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) , "397"), a decision is made (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), the winning judgment is performed based on the big hit judgment table for the high probability state among the hit judgment tables (see FIG. 8A) (S1309). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449", It is called "503".

If it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is a "jackpot" (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read and shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown (S1310), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is finished. . In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, the 15R third big hit and the 2R fourth big hit, and the second If it is determined that the special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, it is a 15R fifth big hit or a 15R sixth big hit (see FIG. 8(B)).

Corresponding to this, in this embodiment, the jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot type is the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, the 15R fifth jackpot or the 15R sixth jackpot. A long hit flag to be turned on and a short hit flag to be turned on when the 2R fourth big hit is provided. Then, when the 2R fourth big win is achieved and the short win flag is turned ON, the 2R lamp (see FIG. 4) of the round indicator 45 lights up at the timing when the 2R fourth big win symbol is displayed. be done. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R▴15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights on, Δ: lights off). In addition, when the long hit flag is turned on as one of the 15R first to third big hits, the 15R fifth big hit and the 15R sixth big hit, the 15R lamp (Fig. 4) is lit up. Specifically, it becomes a display mode like "2RΔ15R▴".

Here, the big hit judgment (special symbol success or failure judgment) and the big hit type determination judgment may be called "judgment" respectively, and even if it is called "judgment" including which big hit pattern is determined by judging the big hit good. These results may also be called "determination results".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A) ). Then, when it is determined that it is not a "small hit" (NO in S1305), the winning pattern is determined (S1308), and the process ends. That is, if the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is neither a "big hit" nor a "minor hit", the result is a "loss". On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the small hit determination (S1305) is "small hit" (YES in S1305), the small hit pattern is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is performed. Finish. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not the game is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for judging whether or not the special symbol is appropriate.

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) next to the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1401 ). Then, if it is not a time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is a non time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), a non time saving state Refer to the middle jackpot table (part corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) ( S1403). It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-time-saving state medium jackpot table is also divided according to whether the jackpot is a long hit (15R jackpot) or a short hit (2R jackpot) (see FIG. 9). However, this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, and there is only the 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the part referred to in this process is always the long hit part, and the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected. In addition, the table for big hits in non-time-saving state does not need to be divided into the object for long hits, and the object for short hits. This is the same for the table for big hits in the time saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), refer to the non-time saving state medium and small hit table (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and change A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, the variation pattern P4 is always selected in this embodiment.

Also, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it means that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and in this case, whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" or "2". It is determined whether or not (S1406). The number of reservations here is the number of memories including the information that determines the variation pattern by this process, so the number of reservations is any value from "1" to "4". Then, in S1406, if it is determined that the number of reservations is "1" or "2" (YES in S1406), the table for the first reservation number in the non-time saving state (non-time saving out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 state and off and the part corresponding to the number of held balls "1, 2"), and select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1407). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P5 to P8 is selected.

On the other hand, in S1406, if it is determined that the number of holds is not "1" or "2", that is, "3" or "4" (NO in S1406), the table for the second hold number out of non-time saving state (Fig. 9 of the variation pattern table shown in Figure 9, the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and off and the number of retained balls "3, 4"), and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) Select (S1408). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P9 to P12 is selected. Here, the first pending number deviation table in the non-time saving state is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a variation pattern of a relatively long time variation time than the second pending number deviation table. Also, the shortest selectable fluctuation time (12000 ms) is set to be longer than that of the table for second reserved number deviation (4000 ms). In other words, when it comes off, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is "3" or "4", the number of reserved balls of special symbols A variation pattern with a shorter variation time than when the value is 1 or 2 is selected.

Also, in the above-mentioned S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1410 in FIG. 25). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the table for the jackpot in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). As described above, this process is a variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, and since there is only a 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the jackpot that is won in the special figure 2 lottery (see FIG. 6 See), in S1411, the variation pattern P13 or P14 corresponding to the long hit is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON at S1410 (NO at S1410), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1412). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1412), referring to the time saving state medium and small hitting table (the part corresponding to the time saving state and small hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern random number A variation pattern is selected based on the counter value (S1416). Specifically, the variation pattern P16 is always selected in this embodiment.

Also, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON in S1412 (NO in S1412), that is, if it is out, it is determined whether or not the number of pending second special symbols is "1" (S1413). The number of reservations referred to here is also the same as described above, and the number of reservations is any value from "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined that the number of reservations is "1" (YES in S1413), the table for the third reservation number out of the time saving state (non-time saving state and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of reserved balls " 1”) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1414). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P17 to P20 is selected. On the other hand, in S1413, if the number of holds is not "1", that is, if it is determined that the number of holds is any of "2" to "4" (NO in S1413), the table for the fourth hold number out of time saving state (The part corresponding to the time saving state and off and the number of held balls "2 to 4" in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is selected (S1415). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P21 to P24 is selected.

In this way, in the variation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls when out is the number of held balls "2 ” to “4”. In addition, when a long hit is won among jackpots, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the non-time-saving state. That is, the variation pattern table during the time saving state is a table such that the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the variation pattern table during the non-time saving state. As a result, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state (normal state), the digestion speed of the special figure reservation is hastened (the game during the time saving progresses quickly).

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 24 is performed, and this processing ends. It should be noted that, in other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to special figure 2) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is one lower side (for example, if the second special figure reservation storage unit consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003", the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (if stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) in the special symbol standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

Also, in the special symbol standby process (S1102) in FIG. 22, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) To, special figure 1 propriety determination processing (S1207), special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1612) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1601, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) Read out the random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for special symbol suitability determination. Also, in the determination of the type of jackpot in S1610, there is a possibility that it is determined to be any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, and the 2R fourth jackpot (FIG. 8(B)). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 8(B), the allocation ratio of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, and 15R third jackpot. is 30%, and the 2R fourth jackpot is 10%. When it is determined that the big hit is any of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit and the 15R third big hit, the long hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1612. On the other hand, when it is determined as the 2R fourth big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1612.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this processing is omitted.

However, since this process is a process related to special figure 1, if YES in S1702 (Fig. 28) (that is, if the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R jackpot). 2 jackpot or 15R third jackpot) is determined (S1703). Then, if it is a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the non-time saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and long hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot in S1703 (NO in S1703), that is, if it is a 2R fourth jackpot (short hit), the table for the 2R jackpot during the non-time saving state (out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 The part corresponding to the non-time saving state and short hit) is referred to, and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

In addition, in this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, when YES in S1712 (Fig. 29) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot) , 15R third jackpot) is determined (S1713). And if it is a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1713), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and long hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1714). Specifically, the variation pattern P13 or P14 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R big hit in S1713 (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R fourth big hit (short hit), the table for the 2R big hit in the time saving state (time saving of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The part corresponding to the state and short hit) is referred to, and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P15 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after selecting the variation pattern, other processes (S1705, FIG. 28) are performed and this process ends. In other processing (S1705), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to special figure 1) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Then, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S1802). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the first special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variable counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether the value of the probability variable counter is "0" (S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the variable probability counter is "0", the variable probability flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO at S1903), or if it is determined that the variable probability counter is not "0" (NO at S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

And in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. Subtract 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (S1908), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), turn off the time-saving flag (S1910), proceed to the processing of S1911. Also, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) or if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination results of the special symbol propriety determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is finished.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then whether the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (one of 15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, 15R third jackpot, and 15R fifth jackpot). is determined (S2002). Then, if the 15R big hit (that is, if the long-hit flag is ON), the round to be executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening) The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to "15", and as the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) (see FIG. 6), 15R first 15R 1st jackpot opening pattern for 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot opening pattern for 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot opening pattern for 15R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot opening pattern If there is, the opening pattern for the 15R fifth big hit is set, and if it is the 15R sixth big hit, the opening pattern for the 15R sixth big hit is set (S2003).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that it is not the 15R jackpot (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the jackpot type is the 2R fourth jackpot. The opening pattern for the 2R fourth big win (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) (S2004).

After completing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), start the jackpot game opening effect (S2006), and set the special figure operation status to "4". (S2007).

Also, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON in S2001 (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). As a result, if the small-hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small-hit open counter for counting the number of openings of the big-hit opening (second big-hit opening 35) during the small-hit game is set to "2". , and an opening pattern for a small win (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) (S2009). Then, in order to start the small winning game, set the opening command of the small winning game (S2010), start the opening effect of the small winning game (S2011), and set the special figure operation status to "5" (S2012). . In addition, if the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process ends.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is turned OFF ( S2102). Also, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low probability and low base state during execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), whether or not the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) has come, that is, the opening time of the big win has passed. Then, it is determined whether it is time to start the first round, or whether it is time to start the next round (next opening) after the time interval between rounds has elapsed (S2107). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big winning type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round after the opening period has ended. Further, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether or not the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period has ended. Incidentally, the round may be simply referred to as "R" and may also be referred to as "round game".

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the round to be executed corresponds to either the first round or the second round, that is, whether or not it is the V round (S2108). ). This may be determined by using the value of a round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed separately. If the round to be executed is not the V round (NO in S2108), that is, if it is any of the 3rd to 15th rounds, the process proceeds to S2110 and the first big win according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of jackpot. In order to open the winning opening 30, the first big winning device 31 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round to be executed is the V round (1st round or 2nd round) (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110 to determine the type of jackpot. The second big winning device 36 is operated to open the second big winning port 35 in accordance with the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to . Also, when opening the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), that is, when starting a round, a round start command for the corresponding round is set. For example, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output process of S201.

In the V valid period setting process (S2109), a specific area is set for several seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (1st round or 2nd round in this embodiment). A period (corresponding to the first period) during which detection of the game ball by the sensor 39a is determined to be effective is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, the period other than this (including the time during the small hit or when the special game is not executed) is the period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. is set to Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401 to S2403 of the specific area sensor detection process described later). ), and determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a.

Here, at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state indicator 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. to be notified. Specifically, the gaming state display 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In this embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (eg, □: off, ▪: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of "a1, a2, a3," is set. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is set to "a1□a2□a3□". In addition, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the jackpot game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode remains "a1□a2□a3□". , the display mode may be "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

That is, in the later-described specific area sensor detection process (S208), the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid period). The V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected in the middle). In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process described later). By doing so, the V flag is prevented from being turned ON based on passing through the V by fraudulent act, that is, the high probability state is prevented from being illegally set.

In addition, if there is a V pass in the V round (1st or 2nd round) of the big win game, the game state after the end of the big win game is set to a high probability state, and even if there is a V pass during the small win game, If the game state before the small winning game is a normal state, the game state after the small winning game is also normal state, and if the game state before the small winning game is a high probability state, after the small winning game is ended. The game state is also set to a high probability state. In other words, before and after the small winning game, the success/failure determination probability is not changed.

In this embodiment, in the V effective period setting process (S2109), even when the 15R second and third big hits are determined to be valid, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be effective (first period). However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second and third jackpots, the first period may not be set in the V round. That is, in the case of the 15R second and third jackpots, the V round may be set to the second period. 15R In the jackpot game related to the second and third jackpots, the opening time of the second jackpot 35 is set to a very short time of 0.1 second, so the game ball enters the second jackpot 35. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the second period is set, the V flag will not be turned ON even if the ball hits the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally, or from being turned on due to a rare ball entry. In this embodiment, the 1st round and the 2nd round are defined as V rounds, and the detection of game balls by the specific area sensor 39a is effective in the V rounds, but the location of the V rounds is not limited to this.

In S2106, if the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is open (YES in S2106), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 per round in this embodiment) (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been entered (NO in S2111), whether or not the time (timing) to close the big prize gate has come, that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the big prize gate (see FIG. 6) (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning slot has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the specified number of balls has been entered (YES in S2111), or if the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), one of the two round end conditions is met. If so, the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined not to be "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round. Also, when closing the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), that is, when ending the round, the round end command of the corresponding round is set. For example, a round end command capable of specifying the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output processing of S201. In addition, the round end command is transmitted when the round except for the final round of the jackpot game ends, that is, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" in S2115. For example, if the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed is 15R jackpot game, the round end command is transmitted until the end of 14R, but is not transmitted at the end of 15R. This is because an ending command to be set in the process of S2116, which will be described later, is transmitted at the end of the final round.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending effect is started. (S2117). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process ends. The round counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 15 times in the case of a long hit (15R jackpot), and the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice in the case of a short hit (2R jackpot). It becomes "0" when executed.

Also, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), since the final round has ended, it is determined whether or not the execution time (ending time) of the jackpot ending production has elapsed. (S2119) If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2119), after turning OFF the jackpot end flag (S2120), the later-described game state setting process (S2121) is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207). It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) functions as a "special game execution means".

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36), which will be described later. Then, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), the variable probability counter is set to "100" (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and S2205 Proceed to processing. On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the process proceeds to S2205 without turning ON the variable probability flag. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in the game state setting process. .

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, if it is determined to be a 15R big hit (YES at S2205), it is determined whether or not the 15R big hit is the 15R third big hit (S2206), and if it is a 15R third big hit (YES at S2206), that is the case. After finishing the process, if it is not the 15R 3rd jackpot, that is, if it is one of the 15R 1st, 2nd and 5th jackpots (NO in S2206), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207), and the time saving counter is set to "100" ” is set (S2208), and the process ends. Here, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot or the 15R fifth jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific region 39 (V passage) during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON. Since it should be there (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game in this case becomes a high probability high base state. Also, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R second jackpot, the V flag should not be turned ON during the jackpot game (NO in S2201), so after the jackpot game ends in this case The game state of becomes a low certainty high base state. Also, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R third jackpot, the V flag should not be turned ON during the jackpot game (NO in S2201), so after the jackpot game ends in this case The game state of becomes a low probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S2205, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is not the 15R jackpot, that is, the 2R fourth jackpot (NO in S2205), the game state before the start of this jackpot game, namely It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the 2R fourth big hit was the time saving state (S2209), and if it is determined that it was not the time saving state (NO in S2209), the time saving flag is not turned ON and processed as it is. finish. As a result, when the V flag is not turned ON in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low probability low base state, and the V flag is turned ON in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S2209, when it is determined that the gaming state when the 2R fourth big hit was the time saving state (YES in S2209), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207), and "100" is set to the time saving counter. (S2208), and the process ends. As a result, when the V flag does not turn ON in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low probability high base state, and the V flag turns ON in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability high base state.

In addition, the high probability high base state, the low probability high base state and the high probability low base state are any of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and that the next big hit occurs. It ends when it is established.

In addition, the processing (S2209) for determining whether the gaming state before the start of the big hit game related to the 2R fourth big hit is the time saving state is performed by setting the operating state of the time saving function and the high base function before and after the big hit game to the small hit. This is to make the state (condition) the same as when If these operating states are different between the case of the 2R fourth big win and the case of the small win, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is the opening pattern of the big winning opening, the subsequent game state (time saving function and This is because, depending on the operating state of the high base function, it becomes possible to easily determine which hit. As a result, the 2R fourth big win and the small win are made difficult to discriminate by the opening pattern of the big prize winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function after that.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning opening 35 has ended in the small-hit game. If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is open (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) has come, that is, the opening time of the small win. It is determined whether the time has elapsed and the time has come to start opening the first time, or whether the time for starting the next opening has arrived after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2303). If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, after performing V invalid period setting processing (S2304), proceed to S2305, in order to open the second big winning opening 35 according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) The second big winning device 36 is activated.

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game and for several seconds after the closing of the second big winning hole 35. A period (second period) for determination is set. In this embodiment, the period other than the period determined as the valid period in the V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is not reached, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80), which counts down the elapse of the V valid period, is set to "0" (ie, no valid period). do. If the V timer is not "0", it is set to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0" without checking whether the V timer is "0", that is, set to a state of no effective period. Thus, even if there is V passage during the small winning game, if the game state before starting the small winning game is the normal state, the game state after finishing the small winning game does not shift to the high probability state. In this embodiment, the period other than the valid period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, so the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the second big winning hole 35 is open in S2302, (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the second big winning hole 35 during two openings, that is, the game balls entered in the two openings has reached the specified maximum number of incoming balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been entered (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second large prize winning port 35, that is, the predetermined opening time (Fig. 6 See) has passed (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the second big prize-winning port 35 during the second opening has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2306), the second big prize-winning port 35 is closed (S2314). , S2311 to move to small hit end processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 has passed (YES in S2307), the second big winning opening 35 is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the open counter for small hits is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the open counter for small hits is "0" (S2310). If it is determined that it is not "0" in S2310 (NO in S2310), the next opening will be started, so the process will end as it is.

On the other hand, when it determines with it being "0" by S2310 (it is YES by S2310), it transfers to the small hit completion|finish process of S2311. In S2311, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set (S2311), and a small-hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, a small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process ends. It should be noted that the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening has been completed twice, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), turn off the small hit end flag (S2316), turn off the small hit flag (S2317), and set the special figure operation status to "1" set (S2318) and terminate the process. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207).

It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 36) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state is not changed before and after execution of the small winning game. It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above special electric accessary product processing 2 (S1109) functions as a "small profit special game executing means".

[Specific area sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S208) next to the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 36, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). ) and terminate the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2401 that there is detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) described above. In this embodiment, the V validity period is set in the first round and the second round in the jackpot game.

Also, if it is determined in S2402 that it is in the V valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the big hit game currently being executed is the 2R big hit (2R fourth big hit) (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R big hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R big hit, the 1st V passage command is set (S2405), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a 2R big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passage command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V passing command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes the game performance in the performance symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V passing command. .

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passing command is set without turning ON the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. The first V-pass command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform notification control of V-pass. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for in principle not allowing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the specific area sensor detection process (S208) and the V effective period setting process (S2109), thereby switching between valid and invalid for passing the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Processing of number of pending balls]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S208) and then the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 37, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read. (S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data related to the number of pending balls (number of pending balls command) is output by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105), and the data related to the number of pending balls (number of pending balls command) is output for each interrupt process. to the output buffer (S2502) and output processing (S201) are sequentially performed.

When the sub-control unit 90 that has received this pending ball number command determines that the special figure pending ball number has increased or decreased based on the received pending ball number command, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 accordingly The display contents of the effect pending display area (first effect pending display area 9c, second effect pending display area 9d) are updated. Specifically, for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased by 1 from "3" to "4", the first effect reservation 9a corresponding to the increased number of special figure 1 reserved balls "4" It is additionally displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c. Also, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is reduced by 1 from "2" to "1" (that is, when the first special figure reservation is digested), the left end of the first effect reservation display area 9c (special figure 1 reservation The location corresponding to the number of balls "1", see FIG. 3) is erased, or moved to the variable suspension display area (not shown) and displayed. , the first effect suspension 9a displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one to the left. On the other hand, the display content of the second effect reservation 9b (second special figure reservation) can be updated in the same manner as the first effect reservation 9a (first special figure reservation).

In addition, regarding the data of the number of special reserved balls when the number of special reserved balls is added, that is, the data of the number of special reserved balls associated with the occurrence of the start ball (start winning), the above-mentioned start ball command Alternatively, the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of special reserved balls after the addition (after starting entering ball) may be set in the output buffer together with the starting entering ball command. In addition, regarding the data of the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is subtracted, that is, the data of the number of reserved balls associated with the start of fluctuation of special symbols (digestion of special reserved balls), the above-mentioned fluctuation start command It may be set in the output buffer together with the fluctuation start command including or holding number of balls command indicating the number of special figure holding balls after subtraction (after special figure holding digestion).

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 38, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), it is first determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control section 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 51. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control section). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes a sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized, and the process proceeds to S4004. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. When the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the information is restored based on the data backed up in the RAM without initializing the RAM. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters.

Note that these S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, even in the effect control microcomputer 91, the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, the data related to the effect control at the time of power failure such as power failure is backed up. For this reason, when the power is turned on after recovery from a power failure such as a power failure (at the time of power failure recovery), unless the initialization of the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4003) is performed, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 The state of returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . The random number for determining the effect includes the random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for determining the previous notice effect that determines the previous notice effect, and the random number for determining the effect pattern that determines the effect pattern. There are random numbers, etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. It should be noted that when updating the random number, the random number may be incremented by 2 instead of being incremented by 1. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 .

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106 and the lamp control. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the corresponding control board, which is the command transmission destination. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various production devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to perform various Production (production pattern game production, special game production related to big hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, the display control of performance symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (the performance symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, the lighting control of various lamps, and the operation of the movable decorative member It is possible to perform control, voice output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not there is an input (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES at S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, based on detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed (S4201). ). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for illuminating lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5, and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and driving data are created by 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a first effect mode setting process (S4301), which will be described later, is performed. In the first effect mode setting process (S4301), a predetermined effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes (also referred to as "game mode") based on a predetermined trigger, and the selected effect mode is set. Although details will be described later, these plurality of production modes may differ in part or all of the display mode of the game production displayed on the display screen, may differ in part or all of the display pattern of LEDs, etc., or may be output from the speaker. Some or all of the voice patterns to be played are different. Next, a received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303). Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[First effect mode setting process]
Next, the first effect mode setting process (S4301) will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the production mode setting process also includes a second production mode setting process and a third production mode setting process, which will be described later. The mode can be changed (settable). As a result, a variety of game effects (game modes) are executed to increase the interest in the game.

Here, the sub-control board 90 of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with an RTC (Real Time Clock) circuit (hereinafter also simply referred to as "RTC") (not shown). The RTC is time measuring means (counting means) capable of measuring time such as the current year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. In addition, the RTC has a function of automatically adjusting the clock value periodically to Japan Standard Time using a radio-controlled clock. Further, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, the RTC operates by receiving power supply from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). Furthermore, the CPU of the sub-control board 90 executes an effect using the RTC (for example, a specific period effect) based on the clock information from the RTC that measures the date and time. Note that the RTC may be provided on the main substrate substrate 80 .

In this embodiment, using such an RTC, when a specific execution condition of every hour is met, a specific production mode (specific period production) for 10 minutes is executed. More specifically, when the gaming machine is powered on, the clock information from the RTC is 8:00, 9:00, 10:00, . Every time before 8:00), the specific period effect is started, and if the specific period effect is started, 10 minutes have passed since the start (8:10, 9:10 , 10:10, . In addition, since this "specified period effect" is simultaneously executed among a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 adjacent to each other on the left and right, a coordinated effect can be executed by a plurality of machines. Therefore, this "specific period effect" is also referred to as "simultaneous effect", "RTC effect", or "specific mode".

Also, the specified period effect is a display mode (background display, etc.) different from the normal state (non-specified period). As shown in FIG. 52(a), the normal state is a background in which characters representing mountains, trees, roads, etc. are displayed. The background changes to display characters representing rocks, people, roads, and the like. That is, by switching the production mode, the display mode of the background display displayed on the display screen (production pattern display section) changes, and the player is shown (notified) that the specific period has come. In addition, in the specific period effect, a mode display section 206 indicating the effect mode being executed is displayed on the display screen, and "specific mode" is displayed. This also clearly indicates to the player that the specific period effect is being executed (that it is in the specific mode).

In the first effect mode setting process (S4301), first, based on the timing information from the RTC, it is determined whether it is the predetermined start time (S4351), and the predetermined specific period effect (simultaneous effect) is started. If it is determined (YES in S4352), the specific period flag is turned ON (S4352), the specific period effect execution command is set (S4353), and the process proceeds to S4354 sail processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4351 that the start time is not the predetermined start time (NO in S4351), the process proceeds to S4354. When the specific period effect execution command set in S4353 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined image data from the ROM of the image control board 100. , a game effect (background effect) or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Thereby, the production mode is set to the specific mode, and the specific period production is started.

In S4354, it is determined whether the specific period flag is ON, that is, whether the production mode is set to the specific mode (S4354), and the specific period flag is ON, that is, the execution of the specific mode (specific period production) If it is determined that it is in the middle (YES in S4354), then it is determined whether it is the predetermined end time based on the clock information from the RTC (S4355). In S4355, when it is determined that the specific period effect is being executed and it is the end time of the specific period effect (YES in S4355), the specific period flag is turned OFF (S4356), and the specific period effect end command is set ( S4358), pre-production switching processing, which will be described later, is performed (S4358), and the processing ends.

In the pre-production switching process, which will be described later, a process of ending or continuing the pre-production for the specific period being executed is performed upon the end of the specific period based on the game situation (preliminary determination result, etc.). On the other hand, in S4354, the specific period flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the production mode is not the specific mode (NO in S4354), the process ends without performing the specific mode end processing. Also, in S4355, it is not the predetermined end time, that is, even if it is determined that the effect mode is the specific mode but not the end time (NO in S4355), the process ends without performing the specific mode end processing.

When the specific period effect end command set in S4357 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined image data from the ROM of the image control board 100. , a game effect (background effect) or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . As a result, the production mode is set from the specific mode (production mode for a specific period) to the production mode for a non-specific period (including normal mode for a non-specific period, short-time mode for a non-specific period, and variable mode for a non-specific period), The production for a specific period ends. Thus, in the first effect mode setting process, the effect mode is set based on the timing information from the RTC, regardless of the execution of the variable display of the special symbols (effect symbols).

[Pre-production switching process]
Next, the preliminary effect switching process (S4358) will be described with reference to FIG. The preliminary effect switching process is a process executed in the above-described first effect mode setting process, and is a process executed when the end time of the specific mode comes while the specific mode is being executed. In the preliminary effect switching process (S4358), first, it is determined whether or not the preliminary effect for the specific period is being executed (S4361), and if it is determined that the preliminary effect for the specific period is not being executed (NO in S4361), the process is finished. That is, when the specific mode ends, if the preliminary effect for the specific period is not executed, the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4361 that the pre-production for the specific period is being executed (YES in S4361), then it is determined whether or not the target change related to the pre-production satisfies the specific conditions (S4362). The specific period effect is set (started, ended) based on the timing information from the RTC, regardless of the execution (start and/or end) of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol). In addition, this preliminary effect is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols (effect symbols), including the variable display before the specific variable display, based on the result of the preliminary determination of the specific variable display. (shown in FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, when the pre-rendering is started in the specific period, the pre-rendering of the specific period-use rendition mode (display mode) is executed, and when the pre-rendering is started in the non-specific period, the non-specified period It is assumed that the pre-rendering of the performance mode (display mode) for use (normal use) is executed (see FIGS. 52 and 53).

Therefore, even if the pre-rendering for a specific period is started during the execution of the specific period production, the specific period (specific period production, specific mode) may end during the execution of the pre-production for the specific period. be. In such a case, the pre-performance for the specific period may be uniformly terminated and switched to the pre-performance for the non-specific period, or the pre-performance may simply be terminated. The pre-performance for the game is interrupted, the expectation for the big win and the interest are lowered, and in the worst case, there is a possibility that the game will be distrusted.

In order to solve this problem or to execute a more interesting game effect, in the present embodiment, when the pre-effect for the specific period is being executed at the timing when the specific period ends, a specific condition is provided. Depending on whether or not it is, the pre-performance for the specific period can be continued for a predetermined period even after the specific period ends (if the specific condition is met). On the other hand, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the pre-performance for the specific period is terminated. That is, in S4362, if it is determined that the target variation (contents) related to the preliminary effect satisfies the specific condition (YES in S4362), the process ends without ending the preliminary effect for the specific period (see FIG. 54). ). On the other hand, in S4362, when it is determined that the target variation (contents) related to the pre-production does not satisfy the specific condition (NO in S4362), the pre-production switching command for normal period (for non-specific period) is set (S4363). , terminate the process. As a result, with the end of the specific period (specific period effect), the preliminary effect for the specific period being executed ends and is switched to the preliminary effect for the non-specific period (see FIG. 55). A specific period in which the specific period effect (RTC effect) is set is called a "first game mode", and a non-specific period in which the specific period effect (RTC effect) is not set is called a "second game mode".

Here, in the present embodiment, the "specific condition" is that the target variation is a variation effect with a relatively high possibility of executing a big hit. More specifically, in the subject change related to the preliminary effect, the specific condition is that the time change display of 45000 ms or more (45000 ms and 75000 ms) is executed (the change pattern is selected). As a result, even after the performance mode is switched, if the advance performance (advance performance) of the display mode before the performance mode is switched is continuously executed, the player's expectation for the big win is increased, and the game interest is increased. can be increased. In addition, as other specific conditions, the ready-to-win effect is executed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed, and the possibility of a big hit is a specific probability (for example, 30%). ) is executed, the preliminary effect is executed over a specified number of times (for example, 3 times) or more, and a specific character is displayed in the target change. may be Preferably, it is desirable to make the possibility of a big win (possibility of executing a big win game) higher when the specific condition is satisfied than when the specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Incidentally, the means for executing game effects such as the CPU of the sub-control section 90 is referred to as "game effect executing means".

Next, the presentation modes shown in FIGS. 52 to 55 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a display mode (background and advance notice effect) in the normal mode for normal period (normal mode for non-specific period) set in the non-specific period and in the low probability low base state. FIG. 52(a) shows a scene in which the normal background is displayed in the normal period normal mode (also referred to simply as "normal mode"). Also, FIGS. 52(b) to (e) show scenes in which preliminary effects are executed in the normal mode. Figures 52(b) to (e) show game effects (preliminary effects) that are executed over a plurality of consecutive (four times) variation displays, and the fourth special symbol variation shown in Figure 52(e). This is a game effect (preliminary effect) showing the display result (determination result). The fourth (target) variable display in which the result (judgment result) of the variable display of the special symbols is shown by this game effect (pre-production) is also called "target change". That is, this game production (pre-production) notifies the player of the determination result of the target variation along with the variation display of the special symbols executed before the target variation. Since the game production (notification production) is executed before starting, it is also called "pre-production", "pre-reading production", or "continuous production (continuous advance notice production)". In addition, before starting the variable display of the target variation to perform the preliminary performance, the "preliminary determination means" is a means for determining the result of winning or not determination and the game performance (type of reach, variation pattern, etc.) to be executed with the target variation. It says. The advance determination means is configured by the CPU of the sub-controller.

FIG. 52(b) shows a display mode of the preliminary effect in the normal mode, which is a display mode displayed with the execution of the first variable display of the special symbols. A rank display portion 213 indicating the background rank (the number of executions of the preliminary effect) is provided on the upper right of the display screen 7a. "Spring" is displayed. In addition, a normal mode specific background 211 (specific character picture) modeled after cherry blossoms is displayed as a specific background picture 210 (preliminary effect picture) in the first variable display of the pre-production.

Also, FIG. 52(c) shows a scene where the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 52(b) is finished and the variable display of the next special symbol is executed (indicated by the decrease in the first effect pending 9a). . In addition, in the display mode of the preliminary performance in the normal mode, in the display mode displayed with the execution of the second variable display of the special symbol when the preliminary performance is executed over at least two consecutive variable displays. It shows a scene in which a specific background with a background rank of 2 is displayed in the normal mode. In the specific background of the background rank 2, the rank display portion 213 displays characters "summer" indicating that the background rank is 2 (the second consecutive fluctuation display). Also, as a specific background picture 210 in the specific background, a normal mode specific background 211 imitating a thick tree is displayed.

Also, FIG. 52(d) shows a scene where the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 52(c) is finished and the variable display of the next special symbol is executed (indicated by the decrease in the first effect pending 9a). . In addition, in the display mode of the preliminary performance in the normal mode, when the preliminary performance is executed over at least three consecutive variable displays, the display mode is displayed with the execution of the third variable display of the special symbol. It shows a scene in which a specific background with a background rank of 3 is displayed in the normal mode. In the specific background of this background rank 3, the rank display portion 213 displays the letters "Autumn" indicating that the background rank is 3. Further, as a specific background pattern 210 in the specific background, a normal mode specific background 211 imitating autumn leaves is displayed.

Also, FIG. 52(e) shows a scene where the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 52(d) is completed and the variable display of the next special symbol is executed (indicated by the decrease in the first effect pending 9a). . In addition, in the display mode of the preliminary performance in the normal mode, in the display mode displayed with the execution of the third variable display of the special symbol when the preliminary performance is executed over at least four consecutive variable displays. It shows a scene in which a specific background with a background rank of 4 is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the variable display of the special symbols (effect symbols) shown in FIG. 52(e) is the target variation of the preliminary effect shown in FIGS. 52(b) to (e). That is, the player is notified of the results of the variable display of the special symbols (effect symbols) shown in FIG.

In the specific background of this background rank 4, the character “winter” is displayed in the rank display portion 213 to indicate that the background rank is 4. FIG. Also, as a specific background pattern 210 in the specific background, a normal mode specific background 211 imitating a snowman is displayed. In this way, as the specific background in the normal mode, there are four types of specific backgrounds with different background ranks, and by checking the background rank during execution (by the display mode (specific background) related to the preliminary effect), It is possible to grasp at what number of consecutive fluctuation displays the program is being executed. Further, when the preliminary effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display, the background is stepped up and changed in the order of background rank 1→2→3→4 each time the next variable display is performed. As a result, the player thinks that the big win is approaching, and can increase the expectation for the big win. In addition, the player can intuitively recognize how many stages the specific background has changed since the specific background changes in a specified order of spring→summer→autumn→winter. The specific background (announcement effects) relating to the spring, summer, autumn, and winter described above is the display mode (execution mode) of the preliminary effects for the non-specific period (normal period).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display mode (background and advance notice effect) in the normal mode for a specific period set during the specific period and in the low-probability low-base state. FIG. 53(a) shows a scene in which the normal background is displayed in the normal mode for a specific period (also referred to simply as "specific mode"). A mode display section 206 indicating the current effect mode (game mode) is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and "specific mode" indicating that it is a specific period is displayed. In addition, unlike the normal mode for the normal period (normal mode), a pattern in which a human-like character runs toward a rock-like character is displayed as a background pattern in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The player can understand that the current period is the specific period by looking at the mode display portion and the background pattern.

Further, a remaining time display section 208 for displaying the remaining time of the specific period is provided in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the player can see the time displayed on the remaining time display section and Figure out how long it will last. In this embodiment, the execution time of the specific period is 10 minutes. FIG. 53(a) shows that the remaining time is 10 minutes, and it can be seen that the scene indicates the start time of the specific period (specific mode). Also, FIGS. 53(b) to 53(e) show scenes in which the preliminary effect is executed in the specific mode. FIGS. 53(b) to (e) show a game effect (preliminary effect) for a specific period which is executed across a plurality of consecutive (four times) variable displays, and the fourth time shown in FIG. It is a game production (preliminary production) showing the result (judgment result, content) of the variable display of the special symbol. That is, the fourth variation display shown in FIG. 53(e) is the "target variation".

FIG. 53(b) shows a scene 30 seconds after the scene of FIG. It is a display mode displayed by pressing. In the specific background of background rank 1, a specific mode specific background 212 (specific character pattern) imitating a bird is displayed as the specific background picture 210 in the specific background. Also, FIG. 53(c) shows a scene where the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 1 shows a scene displaying a specific background of the . In the specific background of background rank 2, a specific mode specific background 212 (specific character pattern) imitating a larger number of birds than background rank 1 is displayed as the specific background pattern 210 in the specific background.

Also, FIG. 53(d) shows a scene in which the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 1 shows a scene displaying a specific background of the . In the specific background of background rank 3, as the specific background picture 210 in the specific background, a specific mode specific background 212 (specific character picture) modeled after a larger number of birds than in background rank 2 is displayed. Also, FIG. 59(e) shows a scene in which the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. 1 shows a scene displaying a specific background of the . In the specific background of background rank 4, as the specific background picture 210 in the specific background, a specific mode specific background 212 (specific character picture) modeled on a larger number of birds than background rank 3 (specific character picture) is displayed. there is In addition, the player can intuitively recognize how many stages have changed because the number of specific character patterns changes in a staged manner in the specific background.

Also, the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) shown in FIG. 53(e) is the target variation of the preliminary effect shown in FIGS. 53(b) to (e). That is, the player is notified of the results (contents) of the variable display of the special symbols (effect symbols) shown in FIG.

Thus, in the specific mode, as in the normal mode, four types of specific backgrounds with different background ranks are provided as specific backgrounds, and these game effects (specific backgrounds) are used in the pre-effect for the specific period. Run. In addition, by checking the background rank during execution, it is possible to grasp the number of consecutive fluctuation displays during execution. The specific background (preliminary effect) in which the number of displayed bird characters is different as described above is the display mode (execution mode) of the preliminary effect for the specific period (specific mode). Further, in this embodiment, if the performance mode being executed at the start of the preliminary performance is the specific mode, the preliminary performance is executed for the specific mode (for the specific period), and at the start of the preliminary performance When the performance mode being executed is the normal mode, the pre-performance for the normal mode (for non-specific period) is executed.

Also, in FIGS. 54 and 55, although the type (display mode) of the pre-rendering corresponding to the performance mode being executed at the start of the pre-rendering was executed, during the execution of the pre-rendering, the specified period was changed to the non-specific period. (Specific mode to normal mode) (production mode is changed) execution mode such as pre-production is shown. FIG. 54 shows a mode in which the preliminary effect for the specific period being executed continues to be executed even after the effect mode is switched from the specific mode to the normal mode. In addition, in FIG. 55, the pre-production for the specific period being executed is switched to the pre-production for the non-specific period (for normal mode) as the production mode switches from the specific mode to the normal mode. It shows a mode to do. These control processes are as described with reference to FIG. 44 above.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) show scenes in which the pre-production for the specific mode is started during execution of the specific mode. FIG. 54(c) shows a scene where the specific mode ends and the production mode switches to the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 54, since the specific conditions explained in FIG. 44 are provided, the pre-performance that is being executed continues as the pre-performance for the specific period. FIGS. 54(d) and (e) show a scene in which a special mode preliminary effect (pictures simulating birds) is executed against the normal mode background (pictures simulating mountains and roads). . FIG. 54(f) shows a scene where the performance symbol (“333”) indicating a big hit is fixed and stopped as a result of the variable display of FIG. 54(e). In addition, in the target variation in which the preliminary performance for the specific period is continuously executed, a game performance with a relatively high possibility of winning big is executed. In other words, it can be said that the possibility of the target variation becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the display mode of the preliminary effect is switched to that for the normal mode. In this embodiment, [0:00] indicating that there is no remaining time is displayed on the remaining time display unit 208, and is displayed for a predetermined time immediately after the production mode is switched to the normal mode.

FIGS. 55(a) and (b) show scenes in which the pre-production for the specific mode is started during execution of the specific mode. FIG. 55(c) shows a scene in which the specific mode is terminated, the presentation mode is switched to the normal mode, and the preliminary presentation being executed is also switched to the preliminary presentation for the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 55, since the specific conditions explained in FIG. 44 are not provided, the pre-performance being executed is switched from the pre-performance for the specific period to the pre-performance for the non-specific period (for normal mode). be done. FIGS. 55(d) and (e) show a scene in which the normal mode preliminary effect is executed against the background of the normal mode pattern (imitating mountains and roads). FIG. 55(f) shows a scene in which, as a result of the variable display of FIG. 55(e), the effect symbol (“353”) indicating the loss is fixed and stopped.

In this embodiment, when the specific condition is not satisfied, the pre-performance for the specific mode being executed is switched to the pre-performance for the non-specific period (for the normal mode) and executed. Alternatively, when the production mode switches from the specific mode to the normal mode, instead of switching the preliminary production for the specific mode being executed to the preliminary production for the non-specific period (for normal mode), the specific mode being executed The pre-production for the mode may end (the pre-production for the normal mode is not executed) along with the switching of the production mode. This sets the possibility of a big hit for the target variation when the specific condition is not satisfied compared to when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the preliminary effect may be ended so as not to unnecessarily increase the player's expectation for the big win. As a result, when the performance mode is switched, if the preliminary performance is being executed, attention is paid to whether the preliminary performance being executed is continued or terminated, and the interest in the game in the case of continuation is remarkably enhanced. becomes possible.

Although not shown, the game state of this embodiment includes a high-probability high base state and a high-probability high base state. The high-probability high base state and the high-probability high base state are displayed in different manners in a non-specific period (non-specific mode) and a specific period (specific mode). For example, in the high-probability high-base state during the non-specific period, the mode display section 206 provided on the display screen 7a displays "variable probability mode". In addition, in the high-probability high-base state in the specific period, the mode display section 206 provided on the display screen 7a displays "variable probability specific mode". In addition, part or all of the background may be displayed differently in the variable probability mode and the variable probability specific mode. In addition, in the low-probability high-base state during the non-specific period, the mode display section 206 provided on the display screen 7a displays "time saving mode". Moreover, in the low-probability high base state in a specific period, the mode display part 206 provided in the display screen 7a displays "time reduction specific mode." In addition, part or all of the background may be displayed differently in the time saving mode and the time saving specific mode. As a result, the player can recognize the occurrence of the specific period even in the probability variable mode or the time saving mode.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401) , If it is determined that the process of S4404 has been received (YES in S4401), effect pending information storage processing (S4402) is performed, prior determination processing described later is performed (S4403), and processing of S4404 transition to Effect pending information storage processing (S4402), various information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination random Numerical value, variation pattern random number, variation pattern information, etc.), the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the special symbol reserved ball at the time of transmission and reception of the start ball command (at the time of command generation) Depending on the number, it is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in shift memory format.

For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 out of the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this way is used for execution of various effects such as a variable effect, an advance notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are the special figure pending storage units (first special figure pending storage unit, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be "obtained information storage means". The means for making a determination based on the acquired information in this sub-control board (sub-control section) is also called a "determination execution means". In addition, in the prior determination process (S4403), the various information stored in the effect pending information storage process is determined in advance, and the game effect (preliminary effect) based on the result of the prior determination is displayed before the variable display related to the various information. This is a process to be executed along with the changing display of the . Means for performing preliminary determination based on various information (acquired information) in this sub-control board (sub-control section) is also referred to as "preliminary determination means".

Next, in S4404, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4404), and when it is judged that the fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4404), the second effect mode setting described later Processing is performed (S4405), then variation effect start processing (S4406), which will be described later, is performed, and the process proceeds to S4407. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4404), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the second production mode setting process and the fluctuation production start process. In S4407, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and when it is judged that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4407), the third effect mode setting process described later is performed. (S4408), the performance design is stop-displayed, and the variation performance end processing for ending the variation performance is performed (S4409), and the process proceeds to S4410. On the other hand, in S4407, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4410 without performing the third production mode setting process and the fluctuation production end process.

Here, in the fluctuation production end processing (S4409), a fluctuation production end command for stop-displaying the production pattern 8 and ending the fluctuation production is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 which has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A stop display is made and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is terminated. Incidentally, the variable production refers to various productions performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4410, it is determined whether or not a big hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4410). Here, the jackpot game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 upon execution of the jackpot game, specifically, an opening command transmitted when the jackpot game starts (occurrence of a jackpot) A round start command transmitted at the start of a round, a round end command transmitted at the end of a round, an ending command transmitted at the end of a jackpot game, and the like correspond. In S4410, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands have been received (S4405), and when it is determined that the jackpot game-related command has been received (YES in S4410), according to the type of the received command Then, a jackpot game-related effect process is performed (S4411), and the process proceeds to S4412.

In the jackpot game-related effect processing, for example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command designating an opening effect corresponding to the type of the big win specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer, and the round is started. If it is a command, a round production command specifying a round production corresponding to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the ending effect command specifying the ending effect to the sub output buffer. When various production commands related to the set jackpot are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the opening production and round production according to the progress of the jackpot game. Effect related to the jackpot game is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Here, in this embodiment, when the game state is in the low-probability base state (normal game state), that is, when it is in the "left-handed game state", the result of the special symbol success/failure determination becomes a big hit (so-called “first hit”), when the sub-control board 90 receives an opening command related to the big hit (first hit), a corresponding first hit opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100 . In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an opening performance including a right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to hit the right-handed ball in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 30 ("first hit Also referred to as "opening effect") is executed. In the first hit opening performance (not shown) of the present embodiment, right hitting instruction notification (also referred to as "right hitting instruction notification for first hit") at the start of the jackpot game related to the first hit is executed. The right-hand hitting instruction notification for the first hit of the present embodiment is to display a moving image depicting a game ball entering the big winning hole 30 located in the lower part of the right game area 3B substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. It shall be done by As a result, for the player who has been playing the game (symbol variation game) by hitting left in the low base state, hitting right in the special game state (jackpot game) (playing the game ball toward the right game area 3B) ) can be actively encouraged.

Further, when the sub-control board 90 receives a round start command (1R start command) of the first round at the start of the first round of the jackpot game related to the first hit, the corresponding 1R start effect command is sent to the image control board. 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the round effect display including the display of the number of rounds is started (executed), and a right hitting instruction is given as a right hitting instruction notification during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Display of the image 71 is started (executed). The right hitting instruction image 71 is continuously displayed even in the high probability high base state and the low probability high base state (that is, right hitting game state) after the jackpot game related to the first hit is completed. Processing for starting the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction image display processing) will be described later. Note that the right-handed instruction notification by displaying the right-handed instruction image 71 is also referred to as "predetermined instruction information".

In addition, a big hit occurs in a high-probability base state or a low-probability base state (that is, a right-handed game state) after the jackpot game related to the first hit is completed (so-called “continuous chan”), and the big hit (continuous When the sub-control board 90 receives an opening command related to Chan), a corresponding consecutive chan opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100 . In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an opening effect (also referred to as a "continuous opening effect") having different contents from the above-described first winning opening effect is executed. In the continuous opening effect (not shown), a right-hand hitting instruction notification for the first hit like the above-described opening effect for the first hit, that is, the display of a moving image depicting how the game ball enters the big winning hole 30 is displayed. It is not executed, and the right hitting instruction image 71 displayed during the game in the high base state continues to be displayed. This is because the high base state is a "right-handed game state", and there is no need to change the shooting direction of the game ball when executing a jackpot game related to consecutive chances.

In addition, S4411 is the processing (processing executed when a big hit) is executed when one of the above-described jackpot game-related commands is received (for example, when an opening command is received). S4412 performs processing based on other received commands (for example, normal design fluctuation start command and normal design fluctuation stop command) excluding various commands described above as other processing (S4407).

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination processing (S4403) will be described with reference to FIG. In the preliminary determination process, based on the received start ball entry command (at the time of entering the ball into the start opening), a preliminary determination is made to determine whether or not to perform a preliminary performance, what kind of preliminary performance to perform, and the like. In the preliminary determination process (S4403), first, it is determined whether or not the preliminary effect is being executed (S5001). If it is determined in S5001 that the pre-production is being executed (YES in S5001), the process ends without determining whether or not to execute a new pre-production. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the preliminary effect is not being executed (NO in S5001), then a random number value for preliminary determination is obtained (S5002), and the process proceeds to S5003. Here, based on the value of the acquired random number for preliminary determination, it is determined in advance whether or not to execute the preliminary effect in which the preliminary effect is executed over the plurality of times of the variable display described above. Also, if there is a prior determination (for example, continuous notice, character appearance notice, etc.) related to other preliminary effects, the value of the preliminary determination random number for making such determination is also obtained here.

In S5003, it is determined whether the current game state is a high base state (probability variable mode or time saving mode) (S5002), not in a high base state, that is, the state in which the game is played mainly with the variable display of the first special symbol If it is determined that (NO in S5003), then it is determined whether the start ball command received from the main control unit 80 is the special figure 1 start ball command (S5004). In S5004, it is not a special figure 1 starting entering ball command, that is, when it is determined that it is a special figure 2 starting entering ball command (NO in S5004), the process is finished. In other words, in the gaming state in which the game is played mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol, the preliminary determination relating to the second special symbol propriety determination is not performed.

On the other hand, in S5004, when it is determined that the starting ball command received from the main control unit 80 is the special figure 1 starting ball command (YES in S5004), the determination information included in the special figure 1 starting ball command , a preliminary determination is made as to whether or not a preliminary effect is to be performed (S5005). In this preliminary determination, whether or not to execute the preliminary performance based on the preliminary determination random value for the preliminary performance acquired in S5002 and a predetermined preliminary determination table (not shown), and if the preliminary performance is to be executed, It is determined which execution mode of the pre-rendering is to be used. In this embodiment, as the "preliminary random number", along with the variable display of the production pattern, whether or not to execute a notice effect (specific effect) indicating the result of the variable display of the production pattern, and if executed, that It has a random number for determining the type. Specifically, it determines a background change prior effect determination random number (background change continuous effect determination random number) for determining a background change prior effect (FIGS. 52 to 55) to be described later, and a target hit prior effect to be described later. It has a random number or the like for determining the target-hitting pre-effect.

Next, in S5006, it is determined whether or not the result of the preliminary determination in S5005 is to execute the preliminary effect (S5006), and when it is determined not to execute the preliminary effect (NO in S5006), the process ends. On the other hand, in S5006, when it is determined to execute the pre-production (YES in S5006), the first special symbol reserved number is set in the pre-production counter (S5007), and the process proceeds to S5008. Here, in the preliminary performance (see FIGS. 52(b) to (e), etc.) executed based on the result of the preliminary determination, the variable display of performance symbols related to the preliminary determination is executed from the timing at which the preliminary performance is started. It is executed at least during the period until (start, mid-execution, or end). The "preliminary performance counter" is a counter for determining (controlling) the execution period of this preliminary performance.

In this embodiment, the timing to start the pre-production is after receiving the start ball command (and determining that the pre-production is to be executed), and when the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started for the first time. and However, not limited to such timing, when it is determined that the start ball command is received during the variable display of the production pattern and the preliminary production is executed, the production pattern is not waited for the start of the next variable display. A preliminary effect may be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable display of .

Also, in S5003, the gaming state is a high base state (probability variation mode or time saving mode), that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is a variable display mainly with the second special symbol (YES in S5003), then receive It is determined whether the starting entering ball command is a special figure 2 starting entering ball command (S5009). In S5009, when it is determined that the received starting ball command is not a special figure 2 starting ball command (NO in S5009), the process is finished. That is, in the gaming state in which the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol, the preliminary determination relating to the first special symbol propriety determination is not performed.

On the other hand, in S5009, when it is determined that the start ball command received from the main control unit 80 is the special figure 2 start ball command (YES in S5009), the judgment information included in the special figure 2 start ball command is pre-determined (S5010). In S5010, similarly to S5005, whether or not to execute a preliminary effect and the preliminary effect are executed based on the preliminary determination random value for the preliminary effect acquired in S5001 and a predetermined preliminary determination table (not shown). In that case, it is determined which execution mode of pre-rendering should be used. In S5011, as a result of the preliminary determination in S5010, it is determined whether or not to execute the preliminary effect (S5011), and if it is determined not to execute the preliminary effect (NO in S5011), the process ends. On the other hand, in S5011, if it is determined to execute the pre-production (YES in S5011), set the second special symbol pending number to the pre-production counter (S5012), and move to the processing of S5008

In S5008, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is ON (S5008), and if it is determined that the specific period flag is ON, that is, the current period is the specific period (in the specific mode) (YES in S5008), Select and set the preliminary performance for the specific period (S5013), turn on the preliminary performance flag for the specific period indicating that the preliminary performance for the specific period is being executed (S5014), and proceed to the processing of S5017. It should be noted that the specific period preliminary effect flag may be a flag indicating that execution of the specific period preliminary effect has been determined. On the other hand, in S5008, if the specific period flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the current period is a non-specific period (NO in S5008), the pre-performance for the normal period (for non-specific period) is selected and set ( S5015), the normal period preliminary effect flag indicating that the normal period (non-specific period) preliminary effect is being executed is turned ON (S5016), and the process proceeds to S5017. It should be noted that the normal period preliminary effect flag may be a flag indicating that execution of the normal period preliminary effect has been determined. Next, other preliminary determination processing (such as determination related to other preliminary effects) is executed (S5017), and the processing ends.

[Second effect mode setting process]
Next, the second effect mode setting process (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. The second effect mode setting process is a process executed based on receiving a variation start command from the main control unit 80, and mainly changes the display mode on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit 7b) to a plurality of effects. It is a process of setting to a predetermined production mode selected from the modes. Here, in the present embodiment, as the production mode (set based on the start of fluctuation) set in the second production mode setting process, the normal mode set in the low probability base state, the high probability high base state is set It has a variable probability mode (also called “ST mode”) and a short time mode that is set in a low probability high base state. In addition, a non-notification mode that is set in a high-probability-low base state may be set.

In addition, the normal mode, the probability variable mode, and the time saving mode are different from each other in terms of display mode. Moreover, these normal mode, probability variable mode, and time saving mode each have the display mode for specific periods, and the display mode for non-specific periods. The player can roughly grasp which game state the game state is by looking at this display mode. Next, the production mode setting process for setting these production modes will be described in detail.

In the second effect mode setting process (S4405), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability state (whether the variable probability flag is ON) (S5201), and if it is determined to be a high probability state (YES in S5201 ), and then it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is ON (S5202). In S5202, the specific period flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the current is in the specific period (YES in S5202), to set the "probability variation specific mode" which is the probability variation mode for the specific period as the production mode is set (S5203), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S5202, the specific period flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the current is not in the specific period (NO in S5202), it is a probability variation mode for a non-specific period as the production mode To set the "probability variation mode" Set the probability variable mode setting command for normal period (S5204) and finish the process.

In S5201, if it is determined that the game state is not a high probability state (NO in S5201), then it is determined whether the game state is in the time saving medium, that is, the high base state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S5205) . At S5205, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) (YES at S5205), then it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is ON (S5206). In S5206, the specific period flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the current is during the specific period (YES in S5206), to set the "time saving specific mode" which is the time saving mode for the specific period as the production mode Set the time saving mode setting command for a specific period (S5207) and finish the process. On the other hand, in S5206, the specific period flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the current is not in the specific period (NO in S5206), to set the "time saving mode" which is a time saving mode for a non-specific period as the effect mode Set the time saving mode setting command for the normal period (S5208) and finish the process.

In S5205, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (NO in S5205), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is the low probability low base state, then it is determined whether the specific period flag is ON (S5209 ). In S5209, if it is determined that the specific period flag is ON (YES in S5209), set the specific period normal mode setting command for setting the "specific mode" which is the normal mode for the specific period as the production mode. (S5210), the process ends. On the other hand, in S5209, if it is determined that the specific period flag is not ON (NO in S5209), the normal mode setting command for normal period for setting "normal mode" which is normal mode for non-specific period as production mode set (S5208) and terminate the process.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the fluctuation effect start process (S4406) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the variable production start process (S4406), first, random number processing for production determination to acquire random numbers for determining various productions such as random numbers for determining the variable production, random numbers for determining the advance notice production, and random numbers for determining the production pattern ( S4551). In this embodiment, the process of S4551 is performed at the timing of receiving the variation start command from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the performance symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. In addition, in this embodiment, as the "random number for determining the advance notice effect", along with the variable display of the effect pattern, whether or not to execute the notice effect (specific effect) indicating the result of the variable display of the effect pattern, and whether to execute it In some cases, it has a random number for determining its type. For example, it has a random number for determining cut-in notice, a random number for determining pseudo-continue notice, a random number for deciding step-up notice, a random number for deciding count notice, which will be described later, and the like.

Next, in S4552, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4552). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the variation pattern specification command includes variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. The results and pattern information specifying the type of jackpot are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to discriminate whether (variation display of production design) relates to the first special design or the second special design. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can be used in other processes than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Also, if the received variation start command includes the aforementioned "state change command", information (game state change information) indicating that the game state has transitioned (changed) to the low base state is included. becomes. Here, as described above, the state change command changes the game state from the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) to the low base state (low probability low base state in this example). ), and the timing when the next variable display following the variable display of special symbols that triggers the end of the high base state (for example, the 100th variable display in the time saving game state) is started, the main control It is transmitted from the unit 80 . Therefore, as a result of the analysis of the fluctuation start command by S4502, depending on whether or not the game state change information is included in the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be started this time (variation display of the effect symbol) is in the high base state It is possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the first fluctuation display after shifting from to the low base state. As a result, if it corresponds to the first variable display after shifting to the low base state, a command for designating the display of the left-handed instruction image (left-handed instruction image display command) is included in the variation effect start command, and the sub-output buffer , a left-handed instruction flag (not shown) is turned ON.

Then, in S4553, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4553). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "6", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to F. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A (normal mode), the mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B (variable probability mode), and the mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C (time saving mode). mode), mode status "4" corresponds to production mode D (specific mode), mode status "5" corresponds to production mode E (variable probability specific mode), mode status "6" corresponds to production mode F (Time-saving specific mode). By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current rendering mode.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect will be different. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is changed in the production mode, such as the display mode of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) is different, or the characters, items, and background images that appear are different. be different depending on Also, each of these production modes may have a different background pattern. For example, the normal mode may have background pattern A, background pattern B, background pattern C, and background pattern D, and a predetermined background pattern may be displayed according to a lottery or game period (number of fluctuations, etc.). Further, in the specific mode, the background pattern E, the background pattern F, the background pattern G, and the background pattern H may be provided, and a predetermined background pattern may be similarly displayed.

In addition, the effect pattern game effect can also be executed in a manner according to the effect mode, and when multiple game effects (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. may be In this embodiment, production modes A and D are executed when controlled to a low probability and low base state, production modes B and E are executed when controlled to a high probability and high base state, production mode C , F are executed when controlled to the low-probability-high base state. Therefore, if the production mode is any of A to F, the player confirms the production mode, so that the current game state is a low probability low base state or a high probability high base state (probability variable game state) be able to ascertain whether there is In addition, the production mode is provided with G, and even if the player confirms the production mode, whether the current game state is a low probability high base state (time saving state) or a high probability high base state (probability variable game state) may be set to be difficult to grasp. In that sense, the production mode G can be said to be a probability non-notification mode.

Next, in S4554, the image display device 7, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. are used, and the sub-control unit 90 is the main control of the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern, effect pattern A variable effect pattern determination table (illustration is omitted) and a notice effect determination table (illustration is omitted) for determining a game effect) are set (S4554). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4553 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the variable production pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice production determination table are set. . That is, it has a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and based on the game state (performance mode) etc. from them, a predetermined fluctuation performance pattern determination table and a predetermined notice performance determination table are set. do.

For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a notice performance determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect pattern, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (not shown) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4554, the table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4553 is selected and set from those fluctuation production pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4555, based on the variable performance determination random number obtained in S4551 and the variable performance pattern determination table set in S4554, select a variable performance pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it (S4555) . As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing a reach production (reach with production pattern game production), or when executing a character production using a specific character (character production pattern game production), reach production and character A case where the production is not executed (reach non-production symbol game production) or the like is determined.

In addition, the ready-to-win effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol propriety determination indicates that the result is a big hit, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double). In the case where a different mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stop display (temporary stop display) with the patterns (same production patterns) constituting the big hit mode ), and in a state in which the remaining one continues to be variablely displayed (scrolled), whether or not the remaining one performance symbol is stopped and displayed in a pattern (three same performance symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a production that shows At this time, along with the variable display of the performance symbols, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character, and whether the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode is determined, and whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of Such a game effect (a ready-to-win effect and a character effect, which will be described later) can also be referred to as a story effect (specific game effect) or a purpose effect (specific game effect). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the big win and increase the interest in the game.

Also, in S4555, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4551 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. The performance symbol 8 stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance is out of the result of the special symbol propriety judgment, and in the case of reach presence or failure, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the production patterns is a loose pattern that is different from the other production patterns (out-of-reach pattern). Also, when there is no reach, such as "635" or [559], at least one of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is a different design than the other production patterns. , all of the three production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are different from the other production patterns.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is right is a big hit, and either the 16R 1st big win or the 16R 6th big win, it will be a double number of '777', and the 6R 2nd to 5th big wins and the 16R 11th big win. In either case, it is an odd number pattern other than "777" or an even number pattern such as "666". special design). Also, in the case of a 2R big hit, the three performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in the same manner as in the case of loss (separate eyes). However, for the 2R big hit, a predetermined chance number such as "135" may be stopped and displayed. Incidentally, the stop display mode of the above-mentioned production pattern 8 is an example, and it is possible to appropriately change what to stop display as the stop production pattern when a big win is achieved.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode of the production pattern 8 (variation production pattern, production pattern game production), reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as "SP reach") A, Super reach B, super reach C, character effects, etc. are set, and at S4555, based on the variable effect pattern determination table, which of these effects is performed or not performed (this is referred to as " Also referred to as "normal variation") is determined. Then, when the ready-to-win effect symbol game effect is executed, any ready-to-win effect is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variable effect pattern determination table. Here, as the effect pattern game effect, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of a big win is set to be higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super ready-to-win effect is a game effect with a high jackpot reliability (possibility of winning a big hit) compared to the ready-to-win (normal reach) effect. The ready-to-win effect can be set (executed) mainly when a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) with a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received. A variation pattern with a variation time of less than 30000 ms is referred to as a normal variation (normal presentation) in which no reach presentation, character presentation, or story presentation is performed. This normal effect is a game effect with a low possibility of winning a big hit as compared with the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in S4556, notice production (including advance production) to be executed along with the variable production pattern (production pattern game production) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a performance symbol game performance including the notice performance to be executed. This advance notice effect (including preliminary effect) indicates the possibility that the result of the effect pattern game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, and the effect symbol will be stopped and displayed (confirmed) after the start of the variable display of the effect pattern. This is the effect (preliminary notification effect) shown before (stop display) (during the variable display of the effect pattern). In S4556, based on the notice effect determination random number obtained in S4551 and the notice effect determination table set in S4554, a notice effect that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined change effect pattern is selected and set. (S4556).

In the first embodiment, there are a plurality of advance notice effects with different display modes (execution modes), and a plurality of advance notice effect determination random numbers are provided as the corresponding advance notice effect determination random numbers. Specifically, it has a random number for determining the advance notice of the count, a random number for determining the advance notice of the character, a random number for deciding the advance notice of conversation, a random number for deciding the step-up advance notice, etc., and the obtained value of the random number for deciding the advance notice effect and each notice effect determination A table is used to determine the advance notice effect to be executed. Also, each of the random numbers for determination of the advance notice effect is obtained as a predetermined value by the effect determination random number acquisition process (S4551) in the variable effect start process (S4402).

In S4557, based on the variable production pattern and the advance notice production (including advance production) set in S4555 and S4556, the variable production start command for starting the production symbol game production, etc. is output to the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. (S4557), and ends the variable production start process. When the variable effect start command set in S4557 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 outputs the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4555. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in 1 is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variable effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

Also, in S4557, it is determined whether or not the left-handed instruction flag is ON, and if it is ON, the left-handed instruction image display command is included in the variation effect start command and set in the sub-output buffer. Here, as a result of analyzing the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, the left-handed instruction flag is set when the game state change information is included in the fluctuation start command, that is, when the game state changes from the high base state (right-handed game state) It is a flag that is turned ON when shifting (changing) to a low base state (left-handed gaming state). When the left-handed instruction image display command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the variation effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 changes the image data for the variable effect and the image data for the notice effect. In addition, the left-handed instruction notification image data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect, the notice effect, the left-handed instruction notification, etc. based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. do. Also, along with the execution (start) of the left-handed instruction notification, the right-handed instruction image 71 displayed in the high base state until then is erased from the display screen 7a.

The left-handed instruction flag that is turned ON based on the analysis result of the above-mentioned variation start command can be set by setting the left-handed instruction image display command (variation start command) in the sub output buffer, or by setting the left-handed instruction image display command It is turned off based on the transmission of the (variation start command) to the image control board 100 . Along with this, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off a right-handed display flag, which will be described later.

Here, the left-handed instruction notification performed by the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) of the present embodiment is to shoot a game ball toward the left-handed game area 3A in the left-handed display area 70c provided on the display screen 7a. This is performed by displaying a left-handed instruction image 70 for instructing that. The left-handed instruction image 70 consists of a left-handed character image 70a representing characters of "please return to left-handed" and three left-handed arrow images 70b positioned above the left-handed character image 70a. In this embodiment, this left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (left-handed display area) when the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state and the first effect symbol 8 starts to change. 70c). As a result, the player who has been playing the game (symbol variation game) by hitting to the right in the high base state is instructed to hit to the left (return to the left) with the transition to the low base state. It is actively encouraged. Note that the left-handed instruction image 70 is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed on the display screen 7a (left-handed instruction display area 70c) (left-handed instruction notification ends).

[Notice effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the advance notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect such as the advance effect will be described. In the advance notice effect setting process (S4556), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the advance effect counter for controlling the number of execution times of the advance effect is greater than 0 (S4556). At S4556, when it is determined that the value of the pre-rendering counter is 0 (S4556), the process proceeds to S4609 without setting the execution of the pre-rendering. On the other hand, if the value of the preliminary effect counter is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the preliminary effect is to be executed (YES in S4601), then it is determined whether or not the specific period preliminary effect flag is ON (S4602). In S4602, if it is determined that the specific period preliminary effect flag is ON, that is, the preliminary effect to be executed or the preliminary effect that is already being executed is the preliminary effect for the specific period (YES in S4602), the preliminary effect counter (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4605.

On the other hand, in S4602, if it is determined that the specific period preliminary performance flag is not ON, that is, the preliminary performance to be executed or the preliminary performance that is already being executed is the preliminary performance for a non-specific period (NO in S4602), the preliminary performance A normal period preliminary effect execution command corresponding to the value of the effect counter is set (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4605. Here, the ``pre-rendering execution command corresponding to the value of the pre-rendering counter'' means the number of times the pre-rendering is executed (how many variable displays to execute) and the value of the pre-rendering counter, i.e., how many remaining It means a command for determining whether or not to execute the pre-rendering of the round and executing the corresponding pre-rendering. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 52, when the execution of four pre-effects is confirmed, if the value of the pre-effect counter is 4, it is necessary to execute the remaining four pre-effects. , sets a command for executing the background rank 1 preliminary effect shown in FIG. 52(b). Also, when the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1, it is sufficient to execute the remaining one preliminary effect, so a command for executing the preliminary effect of background rank 4 shown in FIG. 52(d) is set.

At S4605, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pre-effect counter (S4605), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pre-effect counter is greater than 0 (S4606). In S4606, if the value of the preliminary performance counter is greater than 0, that is, there is still preliminary performance to be executed (continuous preliminary performance), and it is determined that the preliminary performance will continue to be executed in the next variable display (S4606 YES), move to the processing of S4609. On the other hand, in S4606, if the value of the pre-production counter is 0, that is, if it is determined that the pre-production executed this time is the last (final time) (NO in S4606), the specific period pre-production flag is turned OFF ( S4607), the normal period preliminary effect flag is turned OFF (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4609. In S4609, a count notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo continuous notice effect, etc., which will be described later, is determined, the execution type is determined, and other notice effect setting processing is performed (S4609). Finish processing. As a result, the preliminary effect for the specific period or the non-specific period is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbols.

[Third effect mode setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the third effect mode setting process (S4408) for setting the effect mode based on the reception of the fluctuation stop command will be described. In the third performance mode setting process, when the performance mode under execution is changed to another performance mode by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times, the setting is changed to the other performance mode. This process is for In the third effect mode setting process (S4408), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the high probability state (S5301). When the game state is set to the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game, the high-probability state ends when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without the jackpot in the high-probability state. and becomes a low-probability state. Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch such a probability state (production mode).

In S5301, when it is determined that it is time to end the high-probability state, that is, when it is determined that the variation stop command related to the 100th variation display has been received (YES in S5301), it is then determined whether or not the specific period flag is ON. (S5302). If it is determined in S5302 that the specific period flag is ON (YES in S5302), a specific period normal mode setting command for setting the normal mode for the specific period (specific mode) is set (S5303). , terminate the process. As a result, the effect mode is changed from the "variable probability specific mode" to the "specific mode". On the other hand, if it is determined in S5302 that the specific period flag is not ON (NO in S5302), the normal period normal mode setting command for setting the normal mode for the non-specific period (normal period) is set ( S5304), the process ends. As a result, the production mode is changed from the "probability variable mode" to the "normal mode".

If it is determined in S5301 that it is not time to end the high probability state (high probability high base state) (NO in S5301), then it is determined whether it is time to end the time saving state (low probability high base state) (S5305 ). When the game state is set to a high base state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (100 times) of variable display is performed without becoming a jackpot in the high base state. The base state ends and the low base state is entered. Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch to such a base state (production mode). In S5305, it is time to end the time saving state, that is, if it is determined that the variation stop command related to the 100th variation display has been received (YES in S5305), then it is determined whether the specific period flag is ON ( S5306).

If it is determined in S5306 that the specific period flag is ON (YES in S5306), the specific period normal mode setting command for setting the normal mode for the specific period (specific mode) is set (S5307). , terminate the process. As a result, the production mode is changed from the "shortening of working hours specific mode" to the "specific mode". On the other hand, if it is determined in S5306 that the specific period flag is not ON (NO in S5306), the normal period normal mode setting command for setting the normal mode for the non-specific period (normal period) is set ( S5308), the process ends. As a result, the production mode is changed from the "time saving mode" to the "normal mode".

[Count announcement effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the count announcement effect (also referred to as “count effect”) set in the other announcement effect setting process described above will be described. Here, in addition to the RTC circuit (also called "first timer circuit", "first timer means" or "first count means"), the sub-control board 90 of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided in advance. A counter circuit (not shown) capable of measuring (timekeeping) time by counting at a predetermined cycle (also referred to as “second timer circuit”, “second timer means”, or “second counting means”) is provided. Unlike the RTC circuit, this counter circuit measures time only when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and does not measure time when the power is turned off. This count advance notice effect is executed based on the timing information (count value) from the timer circuit.

In addition, the count notice effect (also referred to as the unit "count notice") is determined in the above-mentioned notice effect setting process (S4556), whether or not it is executed along with the fluctuation display of the predetermined effect pattern, and if it is executed, (see FIG. 57) is determined. This determination means is referred to as "previous count execution determination means". The count advance notice execution determining means determines these values based on the obtained random number value for count advance notice determination and a count advance notice determination table (not shown). In addition, the means for executing the count announcement effect such as the CPU of the sub-control unit 90 is referred to as count announcement effect execution means (also referred to as "count effect execution means").

Specifically, the execution mode (display mode) of the count announcement effect is as shown in FIG. FIG. 56(a) shows a scene in which the count announcement effect is executed during the execution of the variable display of the predetermined effect pattern 8. FIG. A count display section 221 is provided on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and an effect notification section 223 is provided on the upper right thereof. A predetermined value (time) is displayed on the count display section 221, and in this example, a time of 3.0 seconds is displayed. Then, the value (count value) displayed on the count display section 221 starts subtraction display (countdown display) along with the start of counting in the count announcement effect.

In this embodiment, since the operation is executed based on the timing information from the counter circuit described above, the display of "3.0" displayed in FIG. It takes 3 seconds to reach 0. In addition, while the value displayed in the count display section is subtracted, the production pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the background pattern and character pattern are displayed in a predetermined display mode in the other production pattern display sections. there is In addition, the effect notification unit 223 displays a game effect (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) to be executed from now on. In FIG. 56(a), "pseudo-ream" is displayed as the target effect 224 that can be executed. Here, "pseudo-ream" refers to "pseudo-ream notice effect". The “pseudo consecutive notice effect” is a game effect in which variable display of effect symbols is simulated multiple times during execution of one time variable display of special symbols.

Specifically, during one time of variable display of the special symbols (↓↓↓→555), the performance symbols are started to vary, temporarily stopped, then changed again, and then fixed and stopped (↓ ↓↓→535→↓↓↓→555). As a result, even though it is a one-time variable display, it appears that the variable display is performed multiple times, or the temporary stop and re-variation can be executed multiple times, and the execution possibility of the big win depends on the number of times. It is possible to show (the higher the number of times, the higher the possibility of executing a big hit).

In addition, in this count notice effect, when the count value (in this example, "3.0") displayed on the count display unit 221 becomes "0 (specific value)" as a result of starting subtraction display, the effect notification unit A target effect 224 displayed in 223 is executed. On the other hand, although the count notice effect is executed, if the count value of the count display unit 221 is not decremented to "0" and is stopped in the middle, the effect notification unit The target effect 224 displayed in 223 is never executed.

FIG. 56(b) shows a scene 1.5 seconds after the scene shown in FIG. 56(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 56(a). The count value displayed on the count display section 221 is decremented to "1.5" seconds. Further, the variable display of the performance symbols progresses (accompanied by the progress of the game), and the left performance symbols and the right performance symbols are stop-displayed in the ready-to-win mode. Also, FIG. 56(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 56(b). FIG. 56(c) shows that the count value displayed on the count display unit 221 does not reach "0 (specific value)" and stops at "0.5", and the target effect displayed on the effect notification unit 223 224 (pseudo-ream) is determined to be non-executable. In order to inform the player that the non-execution of the pseudo-run has been confirmed, an "x" is displayed on the target effect 224 (pseudo-run).

In addition, in order to notify that the subtraction effect of the count display portion (count notice effect) has ended (fixed), the background of the count display portion 221 is changed to a different color or pattern. FIG. 56(d) shows a scene where a predetermined period of time has passed since FIG. 56(c) (the game progresses), and the performance symbol is lost and the symbol (343) is confirmed and stopped. Incidentally, FIGS. 56A to 56C show one execution mode of the failure effect (when the specific value is not displayed) in the count announcement effect.

Next, using FIGS. 56(e) to (h), one execution mode of the success effect (when a specific value is displayed) in the count announcement effect will be described. FIG. 56(e) shows a scene in which the count notice effect is started during the variable display of the predetermined effect symbols. In FIG. 56(f), a predetermined period of time has passed since FIG. 56(e), and as a result of subtraction display of the count value displayed on the count display section 221, "0 (specific value)" is displayed and effect notification is given. A scene in which execution of the target effect 224 displayed in the part 223 is confirmed is shown. In addition, in order to notify that the subtraction effect of the count display part (count notification effect) is completed and the display of the specific value is confirmed (successful), the background of the count display part 221 is changed (also called failure pattern) from before. change in color and pattern. In addition, in order to inform the player that the execution of the pseudo-run has been confirmed, the target effect 224 (pseudo-run) is surrounded by a specific shape (a character imitating the sun) and displayed.

FIG. 56(g) shows the same variable display as FIG. 56(f), after a predetermined time has elapsed (the game progresses), the effect symbol is a specific symbol ("3*3") indicating the occurrence of a pseudo-run. Shows the stopped scene. Also, FIG. 56(h) shows a scene in which the performance symbols are again variably displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the same variable display as in FIG. 56(g). Thus, when '0 (specified value)' is displayed in the count advance notice performance, the execution of the target performance (pseudo continuation) displayed at that time is determined, and then the target performance is certainly executed. As a result, when a game effect with a high degree of reliability (expectation) for a big hit is displayed in the target variation, the interest in the game for the count notice effect is increased, and a feeling of expectation for the big win after the specific value is displayed. can be significantly increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types (notice types 1 to 17) are stored as execution modes of the count notice effect. etc., one count announcement effect selected from these will be executed. Note that the execution mode shown in FIG. 56 indicates the advance notice type 1 and the advance notice type 2. FIG. As shown in advance notice types 1 to 4, when displaying "Pseudo Ren" as the target effect, the count value (initial count value) displayed in the count display unit is the first pattern (3.0 seconds) with a short display time. , and a second pattern (5.0 seconds) longer than the first pattern. Also, each of these patterns has a success pattern and a failure pattern.

In the count notice effect, when the same initial count value is displayed, the case where the specific value is displayed (success pattern) is a bigger hit than the case where the specific value is not displayed (failure pattern). I set the possibility high. In addition, when a specific value is displayed, a larger initial count value (eg, 5.0) is set to have a higher possibility of a big hit than a smaller initial count value (eg, 3.0). ing. This is the same when other game effects (for example, cut-in, super reach, button effects) are displayed as target effects.

Further, as shown in the notice type 11, even when the specific value is not displayed in the count notice effect (failure pattern), there may be a case where a big win is achieved. Further, as shown in the notice 17, when the target effect displayed in the effect notification unit 223 is the specific effect ("15R"), there may be a pattern that determines the big hit at that time. When a specific effect (“15R”) is displayed, it is a success pattern in which a specific value is always displayed. Also, although not in this embodiment, when a specific effect (second specific effect) is displayed in the effect notification unit 223, the big hit is not confirmed, but the second specific effect is displayed and the specific value is There may be patterns such that when displayed, a jackpot is guaranteed. In this case, in the case of a failure pattern in which the specific value is not displayed, the failure may be confirmed.

[Other Aspects of Count Notice Effect]
58 and 59 may be adopted as another effect mode of the count advance notice effect described above. In the above-described count notice effect, when the count notice effect is executed, the target effect 224 (game effect) scheduled to be executed when a specific value (“0”) is displayed on the count display section 221 is changed to the specific value. was unconditionally displayed in the effect notification unit 223 (see FIG. 56). Instead of this, as shown in FIG. 58(a), in accordance with the execution of the count notice effect, the effect notification unit 223 changes to the object effect 224 and operates the effect button 63 (first effect button 63a). An instruction effect 225 to be instructed and a question mark indicating that the object effect is unknown are displayed. That is, at this stage, the player is not notified of the target effect that can be executed when the success pattern is executed in the count advance notice effect.

In the count announcement effect of this aspect, the player operates the predetermined effect button 63 to notify the object effect 224 to be executed when the success pattern is executed. Thus, at an arbitrary timing when the player operates the effect button 63, the target effect 224 that can be executed thereafter is displayed in the effect notification unit 223.例文帳に追加FIG. 58 shows a scene in which the effect button 63 is operated before the count value 222 displayed on the count display unit 221 stops in the case where the failure pattern count notice effect is executed (FIGS. 53(b), (c) )) and a scene in which no operation was performed (FIGS. 53(d) and (e)).

When the player operates the effect button 63 at an arbitrary timing after the count announcement effect shown in FIG. 58(a) is executed, the display mode shown in FIG. 58(b) is obtained. In FIG. 58(b), the effect notifying section 223 displays "Pseudo-Ten" as the object effect 224 in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63 (input to the input means). It is notified that this "pseudo-ream" is a game effect scheduled to be executed when a specific value is displayed in the final count notice effect. However, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the count value 222 displayed on the count display unit 221 does not reach the specific value (“0.0”), but stops at “0.5”, and the count is announced. end the performance. As a result, it is indicated that the target effect "pseudo-run" displayed in the effect notification unit 223 is not executed in this variable display. In addition, the player can confirm that the game effect that can be executed is "pseudo-ream" even though it was not executed because it was a failure pattern, so that the player can continue the game refreshedly.

On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 63 after the count notice effect shown in FIG. While being displayed (while the target effect 224 is not displayed), the subtraction display of the count advance notice effect proceeds. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the count value 222 displayed on the count display unit 221 does not reach the specific value ("0.0"), but stops at "0.5", and the count is announced. end the performance. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the effect notifying section 223 is not notified of the target effect (while the question mark is displayed), and the count advance notice effect of this variable display ends. Also, by doing so, the player can continue the game without unnecessarily heightening the sense of anticipation by not looking at the target effect that will not be executed anyway due to the failure pattern.

In this way, the player selects whether or not to operate the effect button 63, that is, whether to display a game effect that can be executed (or may not be executed) afterward in the effect notification unit 223. Then, it becomes possible to play a game. As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics suitable for a variety of players and to increase the interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(d), execution patterns when the effect button 63 is operated and when the effect button 63 is not operated when the success pattern count announcement effect is executed will be described. FIG. 59(a) shows a scene in which the count announcement effect is executed during the variable display of the predetermined effect symbols. As in FIG. 58(a), the effect notification unit 223 displays an instruction effect 225 for instructing the operation of the effect button 63 (first effect button 63a) and a question mark indicating that the target effect is unknown.

When the player operates the effect button 63 at an arbitrary timing after the count announcement effect shown in FIG. 59(a) is executed, the display mode shown in FIG. 59(b) is obtained. In FIG. 59(b), in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63 (input to the input means), the effect notification unit 223 displays the target effect 224, "Pseudo-Ten". FIG. 59(c) shows the same variable display as FIG. 59(b). "0.0" indicates a stopped scene. By operating the effect button, the target effect 224 ("pseudo-ream") previously displayed in the effect notification unit 223 is surrounded by characters imitating the sun, indicating that the execution of the target effect 224 is confirmed. . As a result, the count announcement effect is terminated, and then the pseudo continuous announcement effect is executed. In addition, as a result, the player expects to execute the notified target effect (pseudo-continuation) during the execution of the count notice effect (during the subtraction display of the count value displayed on the count display unit), and actually realizes the specific value is displayed, a pseudo-run is executed, and it is possible to remarkably increase the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the player does not operate the effect button 63 after the count notice effect shown in FIG. While being displayed (while the target effect 224 is not displayed), the subtraction display of the count advance notice effect proceeds. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(d), at the timing when the count value 222 displayed on the count display unit 221 reaches a specific value (“0.0”) (based on the display of the specific value) Even if the performance button is not operated, the target performance to be executed from now on is displayed in the performance notification part 223. - 特許庁That is, in this mode, when the success pattern is executed, the target effect is always displayed.

In addition, as a result, since the target effect is notified if it is a failure pattern, the player who wants to check only the target effect that has been confirmed to be executed may choose not to operate the effect button in the count notification effect. be. In this way, the player selects whether or not to operate the effect button 63, that is, whether to display a game effect that can be executed (or may not be executed) afterward in the effect notification unit 223. Then, it becomes possible to play a game. As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics suitable for a variety of players and to increase the interest in the game.

Alternatively, when the player does not operate the effect button, the count advance notice effect may be terminated without notifying the target effect whose execution has been confirmed. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp which of the game effects to be executed thereafter was the target effect. However, a player who wants to play a game without grasping everything expects the possibility that a game effect with a higher expectation for a big win will be executed after that, and rather increases the expectation for a big win and increases the interest in the game. can be increased.

In the first embodiment described above, the specific period effect using the RTC (first timer circuit) and the counter announcement effect using the second timer circuit have been described. In each of these game effects (specified period effect, counter notice effect), the count value is displayed based on the timing information from the timer circuit, and the execution period of the game effect is displayed. For example, it corresponds to the remaining time display effect in the remaining time display part of the specific period effect, and the subtraction display effect in the count display part of the count advance notice effect. In addition, these game effects (specific period effect, counter notice effect) are highly interesting game effects that are executed only when a specific condition is established, and the longer the execution period, the more interesting the game. Also, in the count announcement effect, the longer the execution period, the higher the possibility of a big hit in the case of a successful pattern.

That is, for the player, the longer the execution period of these game effects (specific period effect, counter notice effect) (the longer the remaining time in the remaining time display part of the specific period effect, or the count display of count notice effect) The larger the count value displayed in the section, the higher the expectation for the big win, and the higher the enjoyment of the game can be maintained for a long time. Therefore, when the remaining time of the specific period effect is short or the initial count value of the count notice effect is small, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered or the expectation for the big win may not be sufficiently increased. be.

Therefore, in the specific period effect and the counter notice effect of the second embodiment, it is possible to stop the count value in progress (during subtraction display) and then restart the count restart effect. . As a result, even when the remaining time of the specific period effect is short, the player expects the occurrence of the count stop effect (and the count restart effect) in which the decrease display of the remaining time is stopped, and maintains the interest in the game. becomes possible. In addition, even if the initial count value of the count notice effect is small, the player is allowed to generate a count stop effect in which the count value is stopped while the count value is being subtracted and then a count restart effect in which the count value is restarted to be subtracted. It is possible to expect and maintain a game interest.

[Specific Period Production in Example 2]
Concretely, with reference to FIG. 60, the execution mode of the specific period effect of the second embodiment will be described. In FIG. 60(a), the production mode is set to the specific mode, and the production is executed for a specific period on the display screen 7a. Then, the remaining time display portion 208 shows a scene in which a time is displayed suggesting that the specific mode (specific period effect) will end with 16 seconds remaining. FIG. 60(b) shows the same variable display as FIG. 60(a), in which the remaining time display section 208 of the specific mode in progress is surrounded by a double frame (predetermined stop mode), and the subtraction display (count display) is displayed. ) stops (pauses) at “0:15” (15 seconds remaining).

60(c) to (e), while the remaining time display of the remaining time display unit is stopped at "0:15" (remaining 15 seconds), the variable display of the production pattern and the display screen 7a (production pattern The character effect (background pattern) displayed on the display unit) continues (without stopping) to indicate a scene to be executed (count stop effect). Also, FIG. 60(e) shows a variable display of the next performance symbol of FIG. This indicates that it is possible to execute the variable display of FIG. 60(f) shows a scene in which the remaining time display on the remaining time display restarts counting (decrement display) after the variable display is executed a plurality of times from the scene in FIG. performance).

In this way, even if the remaining time of the specific mode (specific period effect) is reduced due to the display time of the remaining time display unit, the count stop effect is generated, and during that time, the effect pattern can be displayed multiple times. can be executed, and a highly interesting game effect for a specific period can be executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game for the specific mode (specific period effect) for a long period of time even when the display time of the remaining time display section is shortened.

[Counting notice effect of Example 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the count announcement effect of Example 2 will be described. FIG. 61(a) shows a scene in which a count advance notice effect is generated during the variable display of the predetermined effect symbols, and the count value of the count display section 221 is subtracted and displayed to "3.0" seconds. "Cut-in" is displayed as the target effect 224 in the effect notification unit 223, and when a specific value ("0.0") is displayed in the count display unit 221, "cut-in notice effect" is displayed thereafter. is confirmed to be executed. FIG. 61(b) shows the same variable display as FIG. 61(a), in which the count display portion 221 of the ongoing count notice effect is surrounded by a double frame (predetermined stop mode), and subtraction display (count display ) stops (pauses) at the time of “1.5” (remaining 1.5 seconds).

61(b) to (c) show the same variable display as in FIG. 61(a). The variable display of patterns and the character effects (background patterns, battle effects) displayed on the display screen 7a (effect pattern display section) continue (without stopping), indicating the scene to be executed (count stop effect). . FIG. 61(d) shows the same variable display as FIG. 61(a), where the subtraction display (count effect) of the count display section 221 resumes, and the specific value (“0.0”) is displayed on the count display section 221. Indicates the displayed scene. Further, FIG. 61(d) shows that execution of the target effect (cut-in notice effect) displayed in the effect notification section 223 has been confirmed.

Also, FIGS. 61(e) to (g) show the same variable display as that of FIG. 61(a), in which a snowman character whose execution has been confirmed by the count announcement effect is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 61(d). A cut-in notice effect that is suddenly displayed on the screen is executed (see FIG. 61(e)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed from FIG. 61(e), in the battle effect, the effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character (the effect in which the ally character wins the battle) is executed (see FIG. 61(f)), and the effect symbol changes to the winning symbol ( "333"), a fixed stop display is made, and a big hit is achieved.

In the count notice effect of the second embodiment, when the initial count value (initial value) and the target effect are the same and both are success patterns (both are failure patterns), the subtraction display in the count display section stops (pause ) The possibility of a big hit is higher when the count stop effect and the count restart effect in which the count is restarted after the count stop effect is generated than when the count stop effect and the count restart effect are not performed. there is Also, the stop period in which the subtraction performance of the count value is temporarily stopped may be included as the execution period of the count performance, and the longer the count performance execution period, the higher the possibility of executing the big win. Also, the longer the execution period of the game effect (specific game effect) executed in parallel with the count effect, that is, the battle effect, the higher the possibility of executing the big win.

In addition, when the count is stopped until the count value reaches a specific value ("0.0") after starting the subtraction display from the initial count value (initial value), the specific value is displayed while the count value is stopped. There is a case where the count announcement effect is terminated without stopping, and a case where the count is restarted after the stop and a specific value is displayed. As a result, even if the subtraction display of the count value displayed on the count display unit is stopped before reaching a specific value, the player expects the count to start again and maintains the interest in the game. becomes possible. In addition, even if the count notice effect with a small initial count value is performed, the count stop effect and the count restart effect are executed during the subtraction display of the count value, so that the expectation of the big win is improved. can be maintained.

[First count announcement effect of Example 3]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the first execution pattern (first execution mode) of the first count announcement effect of Example 3 will be described. FIG. 62(a) shows a scene in which a count announcement effect 240 is executed with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (special symbol). At the upper right of the display screen 7a, a remaining time display section 208 is provided to indicate the remaining time in the count advance notice effect, indicating that the remaining time is 10 seconds. Then, during the period until the remaining time displayed on the remaining time display unit 208 reaches "0 (specific value)" seconds, a special training effect 242, which will be described later, can be executed, and power can be accumulated in the physical strength gauge 241, which will be described later. and Therefore, the longer the execution time of the count notice effect 240 is, the longer the special training effect 242 can be executed, and the more likely it is that the physical strength gauge 241 will accumulate a lot of power (the effect of accumulating a lot of power can be executed). high quality).

In the approximate center of the display screen 7a, a special training effect 242 that is executed in parallel with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (special symbol) and the count announcement effect 240 is displayed. In addition, a physical strength gauge 241 (also referred to as a “power gauge” or “gauge”) is displayed in the substantially central upper part of the display screen 7a, and the power acquired by the special training effect 242 (also referred to as “amount of power” or “amount of physical strength”) is displayed. ) is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) to (e), as the special training effect 240, a plurality of special training effects with different effect modes are provided. Specifically, the special training effect 242 shown in FIGS. 62(a) to (c) is a first special training effect 242a in which the player runs on a running machine to build up physical strength. The special training effect 242 shown in FIG. 62(d) is a second special training effect 242b in which the player does sit-ups to build up physical strength. Further, the special training effect 242 shown in FIG. 62(e) is a third special training effect 242c in which a Y-shaped balance is performed to accumulate physical strength. In other words, the special training effect 240 is an effect for accumulating power in the physical strength gauge 241 by performing a predetermined special training effect.

In addition, when the remaining time displayed on the remaining time display unit 208 reaches "0 (specific value)" seconds (when the count notice effect ends), the special training effect 242 ends, and the physical strength gauge accumulated by the special training effect 242 Then, a race effect 246 (also called "game effect" or "purpose effect") shown in FIG. 62(f) is executed. In the race presentation 246, if a predetermined character (a character with uniform number 3 wearing a headband) wins the race, it will be a big win. Further, the special training effect 240 and the race effect 246 are referred to as a character effect (also referred to as "story effect" or "reach effect") that can be executed with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 (special pattern).

In addition, in the first execution pattern of the first count notice effect shown in FIG. 62, the remaining time displayed on the remaining time display unit 208 in the count notice effect 240 increases (counts up) during subtraction. there is As described above, the time (also referred to as “initial value”, “initial time”, or “initial count value”) displayed on the remaining time display unit 208 in the first count notice effect is the execution time (execution time) of the count notice effect 240 period), the longer the initial value is, the more likely it is that the physical strength gauge will accumulate physical strength. On the other hand, if the initial value displayed at the start of the count notice effect 240 is a short time (for example, 10 seconds), the possibility of accumulating a large amount of physical strength in the physical strength gauge is low, and the player has a sense of anticipation for a big win. It will be a low notice performance.

In order to prevent such a case (loss of expectation when the initial value is low), in this embodiment, the count value (remaining time) displayed in the count notice effect 240 is subtracted to "0 (specific value )” seconds, a count-up effect (special effect) in which the count value (remaining time) is increased can be executed. Of course, in the count announcement effect 240, there are cases where the count-up effect 243 is executed and cases where it is not executed and remains "0 (specific value)" seconds. As a result, the execution period of the count announcement effect 240 indicated by the initial value, ie, the execution period of the special training effect 242, increases at a predetermined timing, making it possible to heighten expectations for a big win. Moreover, even when a small value (count value) is displayed as the initial value, the expectation for the big win can be maintained at a high level without losing the expectation for the big win.

Note that the count-up effect 243 may be generated just before the remaining time reaches "0 (0:00)" seconds (for example, "1 (0:01)" seconds), or from the initial value to "0 ( It may be an intermediate value up to "specific value)", it may be more than the intermediate value than the initial value, it may be more than "0" than the intermediate value, or the initial value may be It may be before the start of subtraction (counting, change). Alternatively, the specific value may be a predetermined value such as 10 or 30 instead of "0", and the initial value may be "0" and counted up. That is, the counting method may be a countdown method or a countup method.

Also, in the case of the countdown method as in the present embodiment, the value is increased by the countdown effect. A production that extends the execution period shall be executed. In other words, "change the displayed value (initial value, intermediate value) to a value in the direction away from the specific value". In addition, in this embodiment, the greater the amount of power acquired by the special training presentation 240, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot (the higher the possibility of winning in the race presentation 246) than when the amount is small. be done.

In FIG. 62(a), a count notice effect 240 occurs during the variable display of the predetermined effect pattern 8, and the initial value of the count notice effect 240 is displayed as "10 (0:10)" seconds. A scene in which a first special training effect 242a is displayed as the special training effect 242 is shown. Further, since it is just after the start of the count announcement effect 240, the physical strength of the physical strength gauge 241 is still "0" in the six stages. Here, in this embodiment, the initial values of the count notice effect 240 are 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 37 seconds (with count-up effect), 40 seconds, 40 seconds (with count stop effect), It has a plurality of values such as 60 seconds, 99 seconds, 99 seconds (with count-up effect), etc. These are obtained using the obtained random number value for determining count notice effect and a table for determining count notice effect (not shown). It is determined. FIG. 62(b) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 62(a), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the scene shown in FIG. 62(a). As shown in FIG. 62(b), by executing the first special training effect 242a for a predetermined period of time, the physical strength gauge is accumulated to "1" out of six levels.

FIG. 62(c) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIGS. 62(a) and (b), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (2 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 62(b). As shown in FIG. 62(c), by further executing the first special training effect 242a for a predetermined period of time, the physical strength gauge is accumulated to "2" out of six levels. Also, in the remaining time display section 208, a count-up effect 243 (special effect) is executed in which the displayed value (the value being subtracted, "3 seconds") is increased to "30 (0:30)" seconds. showing the scene. That is, when the count notice effect has passed for 7 seconds (when the remaining time is 3 seconds), the remaining time is increased to 30 seconds. As a result, the execution period (executable period) of the special training presentation 242 is also increased, and the player's expectation for the big win is heightened. Incidentally, the initial value (or maximum value) shown in the remaining time display section 208 may have a jackpot determination value. In this embodiment, when 99 seconds is selected as the initial value, the jackpot is determined.

FIG. 62(d) shows the same variable display as the variable displays of FIGS. 62(a) to (c), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (12 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 62(c). As shown in FIG. 62(d), the stamina gauge is accumulated to "3" out of 6 steps by executing the second special training effect 242b for a predetermined time following the first special training effect. FIG. 62(e) shows the same variable display as the variable displays of FIGS. 62(a) to (d), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (18 seconds) has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 62(d). As shown in FIG. 62(e), by executing the third special training effect 242c following the second special training effect 242b for a predetermined period of time, the physical strength gauge is accumulated to "4" out of six levels, and the count notice effect 240 remains. The time becomes "0 (specific value)", thereby indicating a scene in which the count announcement effect 240 and the special training effect 242 are ended.

FIG. 62(f) shows the same variable display as the variable displays of FIGS. 62(a) to (e), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 62(e). As shown in FIG. 62(f), the special training effect 242 displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a has been switched to the race effect 246. FIG. In the race presentation 246, a plurality of characters race based on the power ("4" out of 6 levels) indicated by the physical strength gauge 241 accumulated in the special training presentation 242 of FIGS. 62(a) to (e). When a character (specific character) corresponding to the same performance pattern (“3”) as the performance pattern (“3↓3”) indicating the ready-to-win arrangement reaches the finish line in the first place, it is a performance indicating that a big win is achieved. This is an effect indicating that if a character (non-specific character) other than the specific character reaches the goal in first place, they will be eliminated.

As described above, in the count notice effect 240 of the present embodiment, the player expects that the long-term count notice effect 240 will be executed, and when the long-term count notice effect 240 is executed, To heighten expectations for a big hit and heighten amusement in a game.

[First count announcement effect of Example 3]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the second execution pattern (second execution mode) of the first count announcement effect of Example 3 will be described. In the first execution pattern described above, by executing a count-up effect that counts up the value (count value) displayed on the remaining time display unit 208, the initial value of the count notice effect 240 is an initial value with a low degree of expectation. (Small initial value, for example 10 seconds) is displayed, by counting up to a value larger than the displayed value before the remaining time reaches "0 (specific value)", a count-up effect The remaining time of 240, that is, the execution possible period of the special training presentation is made to look like it has been extended, making it possible to heighten the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, in the second execution pattern (second execution mode) of the first count notice effect, the displayed value (count value) is not counted up, but the count (subtraction to the specific value) is temporarily reduced. By stopping the game, the remaining time of the count-up effect 240, that is, the period during which the special training effect can be executed is shown to be extended, making it possible to increase the amusement of the game. Further, even during the stop of the counting of the count announcement effect 240, the special training effect 242 shall be continued (executed) without stopping the effect. In addition, even if an initial value with a low degree of expectation (low initial value, for example, 10 seconds) is displayed as the initial value of the count notice performance 240, it is possible to prevent a decline in the amusement of the game and increase expectations for a big win. Feelings can be maintained.

In FIG. 63(a), similarly to FIG. 62(a), a count notice effect 240 occurs during the variable display of the predetermined effect pattern 8, and the initial value of the count notice effect 240 is set to "10 (0:10 )” second is displayed, and a first special training effect 242a is displayed as the special training effect 242 accordingly. Further, since the count announcement effect 240 has just started, the physical strength of the physical strength gauge 241 is still "0" in the six levels. FIG. 63(b) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 63(a), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 63(a). As shown in FIG. 63(b), by executing the first special training effect 242a for a predetermined period of time, the physical fitness gauge is accumulated to "1" out of six levels. Further, in the remaining time display section 208, the displayed value (0:05 "5" seconds) stops subtraction, and a count stop effect 247 is displayed in which the value (0:05 "5" seconds) is stopped. Shows what happened. At this time, the special training effect 242 and the variable display of the effect pattern 8 (special pattern) are continuously performed without being stopped.

FIG. 63(c) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIGS. 63(a) and (b), and is a scene (count announcement effect) after a predetermined time (10 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 63(b). execution time: 15 seconds). As shown in FIG. 63(c), by further executing the first special training effect 242a for a predetermined period of time, the physical strength gauge is accumulated to "2" out of six stages. Further, in the remaining time display section 208, the displayed value ("5 seconds") continues the stopped state. As a result, the execution period (executable period) of the special training effect 242 is 15 seconds in total, which exceeds the execution period of the count advance notice effect indicated by the initial value.

FIG. 63(d) shows the same variable display as the variable displays of FIGS. 63(a) to (c), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 63(c). As shown in FIG. 63(d), the stamina gauge is accumulated to "3" out of six stages by executing the second special training effect 242b for a predetermined time following the first special training effect. Further, in the remaining time display section 208, the displayed value ("5 seconds") continues the stopped state, and the execution period (executable period) of the special training effect 242 is 35 seconds in total. Also, the counting of the remaining time display unit 208 is restarted (started) with the scene of FIG. 63(d).

FIG. 63(e) shows the same variable display as the variable displays of FIGS. 63(a) to (d), and shows a scene after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed from the scene shown in FIG. 63(d). That is, the count is restarted from the state where the remaining time is 5 seconds, and when 5 seconds have passed, the remaining time of the count notice effect 240 becomes "0 (specific value)", thereby causing the count notice effect 240 and the special training effect. The scene ending H.242 is shown. In addition, as shown in FIG. 63(e), the physical strength gauge is accumulated to "4" out of 6 levels by executing the third special training effect 242c following the second special training effect 242b for a predetermined time. FIG. 63(f) is the same as FIG. 62(f) described above, so the description is omitted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the execution period of the count notice effect 240 (special training effect 242) is the same, the degree of expectation of the big hit (big hit possibility) is higher when the count up effect or the count stop effect is passed. It is said to be a production that shows high expectations.

[Pre-production and specific production of Example 3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66, the preliminary effect (also referred to as "target-hitting preliminary effect" or "first effect") and the specific effect (also referred to as "arrow effect" or "second effect") of the third embodiment will be described. ) will be described. Here, the result of the variable display of the specific production pattern 8 (result of success/failure determination and performance contents) is notified along with the variable display of the production pattern executed before the variable display of the specific production pattern 8.例文帳に追加The advance notice effect (game effect) is referred to as "preliminary effect" or "forecast effect". Further, the advance notice effect (game effect) in which the result of the variable display of the specific effect pattern 8 is notified along with the variable display of the specific effect pattern 8 is called "specific effect" or "the effect".

In FIG. 64, in the variable display of a specific effect pattern, whether or not to execute a specific effect using an arrow, that is, the content of the variable display of a specific effect pattern is set before the variable display of the specific effect pattern. Execution mode of the "preliminary target hitting effect 252" shown with the variable display of the effect symbols will be described. FIG. 64(a) executes a preliminary effect indicating whether or not to execute an arrow effect 257 (specific effect) in the variable display relating to the first effect suspension 9a of the suspension 4 displayed in the first effect suspension display portion 9c. It is a scene to do. Here, "the first effect suspension 9a of the suspension 4 displayed in the first effect suspension display unit 9c" means that the first effect suspension stored in the first special symbol suspension storage unit 85a (the special symbol fluctuation display has not been executed) ) corresponds to the first special figure reservation (first acquisition information).

In addition, it is possible to store up to four undigested pending information (first acquisition information) in the first special figure pending storage unit 85a, and the variable display of the special symbol is the old one among the undigested pending information. are executed in order from one (starting with hold 1). That is, the "first effect suspension 9a of suspension 4" is a suspension related to the variable display that starts last (latest) among the unspent first effect suspensions stored at this point.

On the right side of the display screen 7a in FIG. 64(a), the production pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and on the left side of the display screen 7a, the pre-production (game production) corresponding to which production suspension (first production suspension) is displayed. As shown, a target hitting preliminary effect display section 251 (preliminary effect display section, first effect display section) is provided. In the target-hitting preliminary performance display unit 251, a target-hitting preliminary performance 252 (preliminary performance, first performance), which is a performance of shooting a target with a bow and arrow, is displayed in the upper part, and an acquisition indicating that the target-hitting performance is successful is displayed in the lower part. A gauge 253 is displayed. FIG. 64(a) shows a scene in which the target-hitting preliminary effect 252 corresponding to Hold 4 is started at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the effect symbols related to the variable information 254. FIG. The target hitting preliminary effect 252 of the present embodiment is performed over a plurality of times of the variable display of the performance symbols (a plurality of times of the variable display of the performance symbols executed before the variable display of the specific performance symbols 8). ) is considered a viable pre-staging.

In addition, the acquisition gauge 253 is provided with a plurality of (two) memories, and one memory is acquired each time the target hitting effect is successful, and by succeeding twice, the acquisition gauge 253 is filled and a specific effect is obtained. Execution of the arrow effect 257 is confirmed. Further, at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the variation information 254 (the variation information) corresponding to the acquired information that is currently being displayed is displayed. By changing the display mode of the variation information 254 (color, shape, pattern, pattern, etc.), the result of the variable display of the effect pattern being executed (big hit, small win, big hit type, etc.) and the effect pattern being executed The content of the variable display (notification of possible effects, etc.) is notified. That is, the specific effect can be executed using the variation information 254 .

In addition, each time the variable display of the effect pattern is finished and the variable display of the next effect pattern is started, the pending information (first effect pending 9a, second effect pending 9b) and the variable information 254 are shift-displayed. Specifically, the first effect suspension displayed in the suspension 4 is transition-displayed in the suspension 3, the first effect suspension displayed in the suspension 3 is transition-displayed in the suspension 2, and displayed in the suspension 2. The first effect suspension is transition-displayed to suspension 1, the first effect suspension displayed in suspension 1 is transition-displayed to the variation information 254, and the variation display is started. Further, when a game ball newly enters the first starting hole 20, the first effect suspension is displayed in the suspension 4. - 特許庁

FIG. 64(b) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 64(a) is stopped and the performance pattern ("375") is stopped and displayed. In the target-hitting preliminary performance display section 251, a target-hitting preliminary performance 252 is executed, and a scene in which an arrow hits the target, that is, a scene in which one memory of the acquisition gauge 253 is obtained by successfully hitting the target is displayed. Subsequently, FIG. 64(c) shows a scene where the variable display subsequent to the variable display of FIG. 64(b) is started. In FIG. 64(c), since the first effect suspension 9a targeted for the preliminary effect shown in FIGS. 64(a) and (b) has shifted (moved) from the suspension 4 to the suspension 3, The arrow indicates that the first effect suspension 9a that is the target of the preliminary effect being executed is the first effect suspension 9a related to suspension 3. Also, the target-hitting preliminary effect display portion 251 shows a scene in which the second target-hitting preliminary effect 252 is executed.

FIG. 64(d) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 64(c) is stopped and the performance pattern ("456") is stopped and displayed. In the target-hitting pre-rendering display unit 251, the target-hitting pre-rendering 252 is executed, and the scene where the arrow does not hit the target, that is, the target-hitting failure and the gain gauge 253 cannot be acquired (increased). was not possible) is displayed. Subsequently, FIG. 64(e) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 64(d) is started. In FIG. 64(e), since the first effect suspension 9a targeted for the preliminary effect shown in FIGS. 64(c) and (d) has shifted (moved) from the suspension 3 to the suspension 2, The arrow indicates that the first effect suspension 9a that is the target of the preliminary effect being executed is the first effect suspension 9a related to suspension 2. Also, the target-hitting preliminary effect display portion 251 shows a scene in which the third target-hitting preliminary effect 252 is executed.

FIG. 64(f) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 64(e) is stopped and the performance pattern ("557") is stopped and displayed. In a target-hitting preliminary performance display unit 251, a target-hitting preliminary performance 252 is executed, a scene where the arrow hits the target, that is, the target is successfully hit, and two memories of the acquired gauge 253 are acquired, and the acquired gauge is filled up. A scene is displayed. As a result, the target hitting preliminary effect 252 causes the variable display related to the first effect suspension that is the target of the preliminary effect, that is, the variable display of the specific effect pattern that is the target of the target hitting preliminary effect, the arrow effect 257 (specified production) will be executed. This adds an arrow pattern to the first effect suspension 9a for which the arrow performance 257 is to be executed, and makes it an arrow acquisition suspension 255 (special suspension, special information). Such a change in the display mode of the first effect suspension 9a is also called a "suspension change". In addition, the player can recognize that the arrow effect 257 (specific effect) will be executed in the variable display related to the arrow acquisition suspension 255, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

As described above, the target-hitting pre-production 252 is executed over a plurality of times (at least two times or more) of pre-variation (variation display of performance symbols executed before variation display of specific performance symbols). As a result, a game effect indicating whether or not the specific effect is executed. As a result, the target-hitting pre-rendering 252 determines whether or not to execute the target-hitting pre-rendering only when the number of pending reservations (first performance holding) is two or more. Determines whether to execute the type of target-hitting pre-rendering. Here, the types of the target-hitting pre-effect include a pattern of filling up the acquisition gauge of 2 memories with the pattern of success, failure, and success as shown in FIG. A pattern that fills up the acquisition gauge, a pattern of failure or failure that prevents the acquisition gauge from being filled (the arrow effect is not executed), or a pattern of success or failure that prevents the acquisition gauge from being full (an arrow effect is not displayed). not executed) patterns, etc.

Then, when the start entry command is received in the received command analysis process, it is determined in the preliminary determination process whether or not the number of reservations is two or more. Then, when the pending number is two or more, whether or not to execute the target hitting preliminary effect based on the obtained random number value for determining the target hitting preliminary effect, the table for determining the target hitting preliminary effect and the number of pending. , and, if executed, which type of target-hitting pre-rendering is to be executed. In the present embodiment, the pattern in which only one memory of the acquisition gauge 253 can be acquired by executing one hit-on-target effect during the execution of the variable display of one effect pattern has been described. Not limited to such a mode, it is possible to acquire a plurality of acquisition gauges by executing target hitting performance a plurality of times during execution of one performance pattern variable display, or to acquire a plurality of acquisition gauges by executing one target hitting performance. The gauge 253 may be made capable of acquiring two memories. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of failure patterns or success patterns of the target-hitting effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

FIG. 65(g) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 64(f) is started. In FIG. 65(g), since the first effect suspension 9a, which is the target of the preliminary effect shown in FIG. (shifting). In addition, since a game ball has newly entered the first starting port 20, a new first effect suspension 9a is displayed at the position of suspension 2. - 特許庁FIG. 65(h) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 65(g) is stopped and the effect pattern ("324") is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 65(i) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 65(h) is started. Since this variable display is related to the arrow acquisition suspension 255 shown in suspension 1 (first effect suspension) in FIG. 65(h), in FIG. It is moved and displayed as information 256 (special change information, special information). Similar to the arrow acquisition suspension 255, by displaying the pattern of the arrow in the variation information displayed in the variation information display section (the variation display section) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, during the variation display being executed, some It is suggested that a game effect (announcement effect) will occur. In this embodiment, an arrow effect 257 using arrows added to the variation information can be executed.

FIG. 65(j) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 65(i), a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. , shows a ready-to-win arrangement (3↓3) in which the medium pattern continues the variable display and a scene. At this time, the arrow effect 257 scheduled to be executed has not been executed. Subsequently, FIG. 65(k) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 65(j), and a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. A temporary stop display is performed with a symbol "4" different from the symbol ("3"), indicating a scene in which the shaking fluctuation continues. When the shaking variation is finished and the production pattern is fixed and stopped at ``343'', the loss is confirmed, and when the production pattern is again changed and displayed for some reason, there is another chance for a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65(k), the variation information 254 is maintained as the arrow acquisition variation information 256 (without the arrow effect being performed), and the player can confirm that the swing variation is finished and the miss is confirmed. Instead of doing so, it is possible to expect that the production pattern will be displayed again in a variable manner at some opportunity. That is, since the player knows that the arrow effect 257 will always occur in the variable display related to the arrow acquisition change information 256, such a missing effect symbol is not displayed in the state where the arrow effect 257 does not occur. To maintain high amusement in a game without lowering expectations for a long period of time even when a player is temporarily stopped.

FIG. 65(l) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 65(k), and after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. The scene where the bow pattern was displayed is shown. FIG. 66(m) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. Shows a scene in which the arrow pattern flies toward the bow. FIG. 66(n) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 66(m). A predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. "4" pattern) is shown. It should be noted that, as a result, the arrow pattern displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 displayed in the variation information display section is deleted. Also, this allows the player to recognize that an arrow effect 257 scheduled to be executed has occurred.

FIG. 66(o) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 66(n), in which a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. shows a scene in which the is stuck in the performance symbol "4" which was being temporarily stopped. In this embodiment, when the performance symbol is a missing symbol and an arrow performance 257 is generated during the temporary stop and the arrow is stuck, the performance symbol that the arrow is stuck in is displayed again. FIG. 66(p) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 66(o), and a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 4” shows a scene in which the effect symbol “4” starts to be re-variably displayed based on the fact that the arrow is stuck in the “4”. FIG. 66(q) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 66(p), a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 8 shows a scene where the jackpot symbol "333" is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display). As a result, a jackpot game is executed, and the player can win various prize balls. In addition, even when the arrow effect is generated and the re-variation display is generated as shown in FIG.

As described above, it indicates whether or not an arrow effect as a specific effect is generated by a target hitting preliminary effect using a plurality of times of preliminary variation. As a result, depending on the target-hitting pre-performance, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not a specific game performance will occur, instead of indicating the degree of expectation for the big win, and to prevent the player from winning the big hit in the case where the arrow performance cannot be obtained in the pre-performance. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from lowering expectations for. Also, when the execution of the arrow effect as a specific effect is confirmed (acquired), the deviation is not confirmed until the arrow effect is executed in the change (because the arrow effect is always executed before the change ends) ), it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a big hit for a long period of time.

[Second Execution Pattern of Specific Effect of Embodiment 3]
Next, the second execution pattern (execution mode) of the specific effect (also called "arrow effect" or "second effect") will be described with reference to FIG. In the execution pattern of the specific effect described above, the target-hitting pre-effect 252 is executed, and when the acquisition gauge 253 can be filled up (predetermined condition is satisfied) in the target-hitting pre-effect, the specific effect is executed in the variation. Arrow direction can be executed. Furthermore, since the target-hitting preliminary effect is executed over a plurality of times (two or more times) of preliminary fluctuations, the determination of whether or not to execute the target-hitting preliminary effect is performed at the time of the preliminary determination, the first effect Executed on the condition that the number of reservations (first special figure reservations) is two or more, and when it is determined to execute the target-hitting pre-performance in the determination (also referred to as "first execution condition"). Therefore, if the arrow effect as the specific effect cannot be executed unless such a condition is satisfied, there is a risk that the execution frequency of the arrow effect will be extremely low depending on the nail adjustment, etc., and the game interest will not be enhanced. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the second execution pattern of the specific performance, the arrow performance 257 as the specific performance can be executed if the second execution condition is satisfied even if the first execution condition is not satisfied. Specifically, in the second execution pattern of the specific effect, a predetermined determination (judgment at the start of variation ) is performed, and when it is determined in the determination that the arrow effect as the specific effect is to be executed, the arrow effect is executed. Thus, even if a plurality of suspensions of the first performance are not stored, the arrow performance as the specific performance can be executed, the execution frequency of the arrow performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Further, in the second execution pattern, the arrow effect is executed not through the preliminary effect (preliminary effect of hitting the target), but by operating a movable member 259 imitating an arrow, which will be described later, in a predetermined operation mode. It is assumed that

In the central portion of the display screen 7a of FIG. 67(g), the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the first effect pending display portion 9c displays two first effect pending 9a (hold 1 and hold 2), The variation information display portion displays variation information relating to the variation display of the effect symbols being executed. Also, in the lower right part of the display screen 7a, a movable member 259 (movable accessory) imitating the shape of an arrow is provided in a state (covered state) at least partially covered by the front center accessory. . The movable member 259 is normally in a covered state (first state) shown in FIG. 67(a) before operation. When the movable member 259 is to be operated, it is rotated clockwise about the rotation shaft 260 to be in the exposed state (second state) shown in FIG. 67(b). Such an operation of the movable member 259 is also referred to as a movable effect 258 (third effect). When returning from the exposed state to the covered state, the covered state shown in FIG. For the sake of convenience, the movable member 259 in the covered state is indicated by a dashed line, and the movable member 259 in an exposed state is indicated by a solid line. It is a portion (and its surroundings) superimposed on the front side of the screen 7a.

FIG. 67(b) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 67(a). (Second position) shows the action scene. FIG. 67(c) is the same variation display as the variation display in FIG. 67(b), and an arrow pattern is displayed in the variation information displayed on the variation information display section based on the movement of the movable member 259. show the scene. That is, it shows a scene in which the variation information is changed (variation information change presentation) to the arrow acquisition variation information 256 (special variation information, special information) without going through the target hitting preliminary presentation. It should be noted that when the movable member 259 operates, the variation information does not necessarily have to be changed to the arrow acquisition variation information (this may include a slipping motion of the movable member 259). In addition, when the variation information is changed to the arrow acquisition variation information during the variation without going through the target hitting preliminary effect, the change is always performed via a specific operation of the movable member 259 . As a result, the player expects the movement of the movable member 259 and enhances the interest in the game when the movable member 259 moves.

FIG. 67(d) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 67(c), and shows a scene where the movable member 259 has moved (returned) from the operating state to the covering state. In addition, the arrow acquisition variation information 256 acquired in FIG. 67(c) is displayed in the variation information display portion, indicating that the arrow effect scheduled to be executed during this variation display has not yet been executed. . Also, FIG. 67(e) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 67(c), and the effect symbol 8 stops displaying the left and right symbols at "3" and continues the variable display of the middle symbol, which is a so-called reach. It shows what happened.

FIG. 67(f) shows the same variation display as the variation display in FIG. is displayed (further change in arrow acquisition variation information). During the variable display of the arrow acquisition variation information in which the pattern of a plurality of arrows is displayed, the arrow presentation 257 is executed a plurality of times, or the arrow acquisition variation information in which the pattern of a single arrow is displayed is displayed. An arrow effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the variable display is executed. Further, as the arrow acquisition variation information in which the patterns of a plurality of arrows are displayed, in this example, in the variation, the arrows displayed in the variation information are acquired from the second execution pattern. The second execution pattern is executed to obtain a plurality of arrows during the variation display related to the arrow acquisition variation information, which is displayed by acquiring arrows in advance in the target-hitting preliminary effect. Arrow acquisition variation information may be obtained by displaying a picture of an arrow.

Alternatively, the arrow displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information may be used, that is, after executing the arrow effect, the second execution pattern may be executed again in the same variation display to acquire the arrow (arrow acquisition variation information → Execution of arrow production (loss of arrow) → Change to arrow acquisition change information again). Further, the execution timing of the movable effect 258 of the movable member 258 may be, for example, immediately after the start of fluctuation or after occurrence of reach. In addition, the game effects described in FIGS. 67(b) to (f) all report the contents of the variable display of the specific effect symbols (judgment results and effects to be executed) during the variable display of the specific effect symbols. It is a specific production to do.

[Second Execution Pattern of Pre-Target Hitting Effect of Embodiment 3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c), the second execution pattern of the preliminary effect (also called "target-hitting preliminary effect" or "first effect") of Example 3 will be described. In the execution pattern of the preliminary effect described above, an example is shown in which the target hitting preliminary effect display portion is displayed corresponding to any of the first effect suspension displayed in the first effect pending display portion, and the target hitting preliminary effect is executed. rice field. The second execution pattern shows an example in which a preliminary effect (preliminary effect for hitting a target) is generated in response to a plurality of first effect suspensions displayed in the first effect suspension display section.

FIG. 68(a) shows an arrow effect 257 (specific effect) in the variable display related to the first effect suspension 9a of suspension 2 and suspension 4 among the first effect suspension displayed in the first effect suspension display portion 9c. This is a scene in which a pre-performance (pre-performance of target hitting) indicating whether or not to be executed is executed. The target-hitting preliminary performance corresponding to the suspension 2 is started before the target-hitting preliminary performance corresponding to the suspension 4. - 特許庁In addition, in the target-hitting pre-performance 252 corresponding to the hold 2, the scene where the first target-hitting performance has already been successfully achieved, one memory of the acquisition gauge 253 is acquired, and the second target-hitting performance is started is shown. In addition, the target-hitting preliminary effect 252 corresponding to the reservation 4 indicates the scene in which the first target-hitting effect is started.

FIG. 68(b) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 68(a) is stopped and the effect symbol ("435") is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the target-hitting pre-performance 252 corresponding to Hold 2, a scene in which the arrow hits the target, that is, a scene in which the acquisition gauge 253 is successfully acquired by two memories and the acquisition gauge is filled up is displayed. ing. Accompanying this, the first effect suspension 9a related to suspension 2 is changed to suspension and becomes an arrow acquisition suspension 255. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the preliminary effect 252 corresponding to Hold 4, a scene in which the arrow hits the target, that is, a scene in which one memory of the acquisition gauge 253 is obtained by successfully hitting the target is displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 68(c) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 68(b) is started. In FIG. 68(c), hold 2 of arrow acquisition hold 255 shown in FIG. moving). In addition, the target hitting preliminary effect display section 251 corresponding to the suspension 3 of the first effect suspension 9a shows a scene in which the second target hitting preliminary effect 252 is executed. In this way, a plurality of target-hitting advance performances can be executed in parallel corresponding to a plurality of performance suspensions, and the target-hitting performances corresponding to a plurality of first performance suspensions are successful, and a plurality of first performance suspensions are executed. At the same time, it is possible to hold arrow acquisition.

[Third Execution Pattern of Pre-Target Hitting Effect and Specific Effect of Embodiment 3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68(d) to (f) and FIG. 69, a preliminary effect (also referred to as “target-target preliminary effect” or “first effect”) and a specific effect (“arrow effect ” or “second effect”) will be described. In the execution pattern of the target-hitting pre-effect described above, when the target-hitting effect is successful, an example is shown in which the display mode of the first effect suspension changes to the arrow acquisition suspension in which one arrow is displayed. In the following, the display mode of the first effect suspension is changed to the arrow acquisition suspension displaying a plurality of (two) arrows, and the execution mode of the specific effect using the plurality of arrows will be described.

FIG. 68(d) shows that of the first effect suspension displayed in the first effect suspension display portion 9c, the suspension 2 has already changed to the arrow acquisition suspension 255 (suspension change), and the arrow acquisition suspension of the suspension 2 255 shows a scene in which the re-target-hitting advance performance 252 is being executed. In the target-hitting preliminary presentation 252 being executed, the first target-hitting presentation has already been successfully performed, one memory of the acquisition gauge 253 has been obtained, and the second target-hitting presentation has been executed. FIG. 68(e) shows a scene where the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 68(d) is stopped and the effect pattern ("557") is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the target-hitting pre-performance 252 corresponding to Hold 2, a scene in which the arrow hits the target, that is, a scene in which the acquisition gauge 253 is successfully acquired by two memories and the acquisition gauge is filled up is displayed. ing. Along with this, the arrow acquisition suspension 255 (first effect suspension 9a) related to suspension 2 is further changed to suspension, and shows a scene in which the arrow acquisition suspension 255 displays a plurality of (two) arrows.

FIG. 68(f) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 68(e) is started. Also, the arrow acquisition hold 255 displaying a plurality of (two) arrows is shifted (moved) from hold 2 to hold 1 . FIG. 69(g) shows a scene in which a predetermined time has passed since the variable display following the variable display in FIG. That is, it shows the scene where the variable display of arrow acquisition suspension 255 relating to suspension 1 in FIG. 68(f) is started. Arrow acquisition change information 256 displaying a plurality of (two) arrows is displayed in the variation information display portion by shifting arrow acquisition suspension 255 displayed in suspension 1 . That is, the player recognizes that the arrow effect 257 using a plurality of (two) arrows will be executed in the variable display of the effect symbol being executed (the variation). At this time, the arrow effect 257 scheduled to be executed has not been executed.

FIG. 69(h) shows the same variable display as the variable display in FIG. 69(g). A predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. "4" different from "3") indicates a temporary stop display, indicating a scene in which the shaking fluctuation continues. When the shaking variation is finished and the production pattern is fixed and stopped at ``343'', the loss is confirmed, and when the production pattern is again changed and displayed for some reason, there is another chance for a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the variation information 254 is maintained as the arrow acquisition variation information 256 (without the arrow effect being performed), and the player can finish the swing variation and confirm the loss. Instead of doing so, it is possible to expect that the production pattern will be displayed again in a variable manner at some opportunity. That is, since the player knows that the arrow effect 257 will always occur in the variable display related to the arrow acquisition change information 256, such a missing effect symbol is not displayed in the state where the arrow effect 257 does not occur. To maintain high amusement in a game without lowering expectations for a long period of time even when a player is temporarily stopped.

FIG. 69(i) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 69(h), and after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. is displayed, and one of the two arrows displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 is shot toward the temporarily stopped production pattern ("4"), and the production pattern ("4" ) shows the scene of being stabbed. As a result, it is confirmed that the effect pattern ("4") will change again and another chance will be granted, and the arrow pattern displayed in the arrow acquisition change information 256 displayed in the change information display section will change to 1. The book is erased (there remains one book).

FIG. 69(j) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 69(i), and a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. This shows a scene in which the production symbol "4" starts to be re-variably displayed based on the fact that the arrow has been stuck (arrow production). At this point, the arrow effect 257 scheduled to be executed remains one more time. FIG. 69(k) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 69(j), and after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. A bow pattern indicating the generation of the arrow presentation 257 is displayed, and a scene is shown in which the remaining one arrow displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 is shot toward the medium pattern during variation. Incidentally, as a result, all (both two) of the arrow patterns displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 displayed in the variation information display section are deleted. In addition, this allows the player to recognize that all the arrow effects 257 scheduled to be executed have occurred.

FIG. 69(l) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 69(k), and the arrows shot in the arrow effect 257 shown in FIG. ("3"), that is, it shows a scene in which the big winning pattern ("333") is displayed by stop-displaying the medium pattern during fluctuation with the same pattern ("3") as the right and left patterns. As a result, a jackpot game is executed, and the player can win various prize balls. Incidentally, even if the arrow effect occurs multiple times with the same change, there are cases where the player loses or a big hit.

As described above, when a plurality of arrows are displayed in the arrow acquisition suspension or arrow acquisition variation information, a specific effect (arrow effect) corresponding to the plurality of arrows is executed in the variation. Therefore, the player can maintain a sense of anticipation for the big win for a long period of time, and can maintain a high level of interest in the game for a long period of time.

[Fourth Execution Pattern of Specific Effect of Embodiment 3]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the fourth execution pattern of the specific effect (arrow effect) of Example 3 will be described. In the execution pattern of the specific effect (arrow effect) described above, the effect pattern 8 is temporarily stopped or the effect pattern 8 is variably displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the effect pattern is executed by shooting an arrow toward the effect pattern. I explained the effect of re-varying display and stop display. The arrow effect in the variable display related to the arrow acquisition variable information is not limited to such a mode, and has other item patterns. That is, the specific effect (arrow effect) has a plurality of execution modes including at least the first specific effect (FIGS. 65 and 66, etc.) and the second specific effect (FIG. 70). Then, when the arrow acquisition variation information is generated, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win in the variation, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the first specific effect and the second specific effect. In this embodiment, the second specific effect is a effect indicating a higher possibility of occurrence of a big hit than the first specific effect.

In FIG. 70(a), arrow acquisition variation information 256 is displayed in the variation information display section, and effect symbol variation information related to arrow acquisition variation information scheduled to be executed as an arrow effect 257 as a specific effect is being executed. show the scene. Also, one first effect suspension 9a (suspension 1) is displayed in the first effect suspension display portion 9c. FIG. 70(b) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 70(a), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 70(a). In this scene, the production pattern 8 that is being variably displayed is reduced to the upper right part of the display screen 7a in a ready-to-reach mode and displayed in a reduced size, and in the central part of the display screen 7a, a battle production 261 (" (Also referred to as "reach effect", "story effect", "character effect", etc.) is executed.

In the battle presentation 261, the ally character 262 and the enemy character 263 fight, and when the ally character 262 wins, a big hit is achieved, and the performance pattern is stopped at the big win pattern ("333"), and the enemy character 263 wins ( If the ally character is defeated), the effect pattern is lost and the pattern ("343") is stop-displayed. FIG. 70(c) is the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 70(b), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 70(b). In this scene, the ally character 262 is attacked and injured by the enemy character 263, and the ally character 262 is in a disadvantageous situation (the player recognizes that defeat is imminent).

However, at this point in time, the arrow effect 257 shown in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 has not been executed (the arrow pattern is displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256), and the player's defeat is confirmed as it is. (A friendly character will not be defeated without a counterattack), and even if such a performance showing an inferior state is executed, the expectation of a big win will be lost. no. In addition, the aspect (second specific effect) in which the arrow effect 257 is executed in the main battle effect 261 is a game effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit compared to the above-described first specific effect (FIGS. 65 and 66, etc.). Therefore, the player's expectation for the big hit is further heightened.

FIGS. 70(d) and (e) are the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 70(c), showing a scene after a predetermined time has passed since the scene shown in FIG. 70(c). This scene shows a scene in which the teammate character 262 attacks the enemy character 263 by switching offense and defense. Also, as an attack means, an arrow effect 257 (second specific effect, specific effect) is executed in which the ally character holds a bow and shoots (fires) the arrow displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 toward the enemy character 263. It shows the scene where it is done. In the arrow effect 257 as the second specific effect, when the arrow fired by the ally character 262 pierces (hit) the enemy character 263 and defeats the enemy character 263, the big win pattern ("333") is stop-displayed and the big win is won. is determined. If the arrow shot by the ally character 262 does not pierce the enemy character 263 and the enemy character 263 cannot be defeated, the missing symbol ("343") is stopped and displayed, and the missing is confirmed. By this, the arrow pattern displayed in the arrow acquisition variation information 256 displayed in the variation information display section is erased, and the player recognizes that the arrow presentation 257 scheduled to be executed has occurred.

FIG. 70(f) shows the same variable display as the variable display of FIG. 70(e). In the arrow effect 257, the arrow fired by the friend character 262 pierces (hit) the enemy character 263 and defeats the enemy character 263. A scene in which the production pattern 8 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern ("333") is shown. In addition, a display (“WIN”) indicating that the battle effect 261 is won is displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 7a. As a result, a jackpot game is executed, and the player can win various prize balls.

As described above, the arrow effect 257 as the specific effect has a plurality of execution modes, and depending on which execution mode the arrow effect 257 is executed, the possibility of execution of the big win may differ. indicates Specifically, the execution mode of the arrow performance (second specific performance) shown in FIG. 70 is more likely to execute a big hit than the execution mode of the arrow performance (first specific performance) shown in FIGS. 65 and 66. as a high possibility. As a result, the player expects that the arrow acquisition suspension 255 will occur in the target-hitting pre-performance, and the target-hitting pre-performance itself is not a performance that indicates the degree of reliability (expectation) of the big hit (specific will occur), it is possible to minimize the decline in interest in the game even if arrow acquisition suspension does not occur. In addition, when arrow acquisition suspension occurs, the expectation of a big win is not lost in the state where the arrow presentation is not executed, regardless of the production situation during the execution of the variable display related to the arrow acquisition fluctuation information. , it becomes possible to maintain the sense of expectation for a long period of time. In addition, since a plurality of execution modes with different degrees of expectation for big wins are provided as arrow performances, it is possible to expect the occurrence of arrow performances (specific performances) with higher expectations for big wins, and to increase the amusement of the game.

As described above, examples and other aspects have been described as embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the wording of each claim does not deviate from the scope described in each claim. They are not limited, and they can be easily replaced by those skilled in the art, and improvements based on the knowledge that those skilled in the art usually have can be added as appropriate.

[Other aspects]
In the first embodiment described above, in the specific mode and the non-specific mode set based on the time information of the RTC, the preliminary effect started in the specific mode continues even after shifting to the non-specific mode under specific conditions. made feasible. Not limited to such a mode, when shifting from the probability variable mode to the normal mode, when shifting from the time saving mode to the normal mode, or simply different production mode (the game state does not change) from the first game mode to the second game Even when the mode shifts, the game effects (preliminary effects, advance notice effects, etc.) for the mode started in the mode (game mode) before the shift may be continuously executed even after the mode shift. Of course, even when shifting from a disadvantageous game mode to an advantageous game mode, the game production for that mode (preliminary production, advance notice production, etc.) started in the mode before the shift (game mode) continues even after the mode shift. You can run it by

In the above-described second embodiment, as a mode of effect to make the execution time of the specific mode (specified period effect) and the count notice effect appear longer, the remaining time display during subtraction display is temporarily stopped and then resumed. In place of or in addition to such a mode, the same effect can be obtained by increasing the remaining time at a predetermined timing or not changing the remaining time for a predetermined period from the initial value (not starting subtraction). Play. In addition, a pause period measuring means for measuring the pause period, a pause period display section for displaying the pause period, and a total performance time display section for displaying the value obtained by adding the pause period and the subtraction period are provided. may

In addition, the pre-performance (continuous pre-performance) can be executed using a plurality of continuous variable displays, and may be executed only in one variable display (object change). These are called pre-production (continuous pre-production). In addition, the continuous preliminary performance includes the preliminary performance in the case of being executed only in one variation display (target variation). Further, the sub-control section that executes this "preliminary performance" is also called "preliminary performance executing means".

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, etc., the number of rounds of the jackpot game is set to have two types of "2R" and "15R". More than one type may be used, or only one type may be used. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the first big prize-winning hole 30 and the second big prize-winning hole 35 (V Attacker) is not limited to the above-described embodiment. It is possible to adopt the aspect of

In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the like, depending on the length of the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round, the possibility of V passing becomes high (easy) or low (substantially It was set to be impossible). That is, when the opening time of the second large winning hole 35 in the V round is relatively long, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second large winning hole 35, and the second large winning hole 35 At least one of the entered game balls almost certainly passes through the specific area 39, and on the other hand, when the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 in the V round is relatively short, the second big winning It is difficult (substantially impossible) to enter the game ball into the mouth 35, and as a result, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39.例文帳に追加Instead of this, a movable piece for opening and closing the specific area is provided, and the movable piece is operated based on the number of balls entering the second big prize-winning opening 35 in the V-round (the value counted by the number of entering balls counting means). , the V passability may differ depending on the operation mode.

For example, when the movable piece is operated based on the first predetermined number (for example, the first ball) of entering the second big prize hole 35 in the V round, the operation mode of the movable piece is changed to the V passability. is lowered (substantially impossible), and when the movable piece is operated based on a second predetermined number (for example, any of the second to the specified number) of hits, the movable piece The operation mode is set to a mode in which the possibility of passing V is increased. Then, a big win in which the movable piece operates only in a manner in which the movable piece is unlikely to pass through the V round, that is, a big win in which the movable piece operates only based on the first predetermined number of balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is called "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and there are cases where it operates in a mode with a low possibility of passing V and cases where it operates in a mode with a high possibility of passing V, that is, the first predetermined to the second big winning hole 35 A big hit in which the movable piece operates based on the number of hit balls and the second predetermined number of hit balls may be defined as the "V-passing planned big hit". Even with such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation function is activated (whether or not a high probability state occurs) based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area, as in the above-described embodiments.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, etc., the player is given a game privilege of generating a high probability state based on the game ball passing through the specific area 39 in the V round during the jackpot game (during the special game). However, the privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, a high-base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole, a variable time shortened state (shorter working hours state) that shortens the variable time of identification information, etc. If there is, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Moreover, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be granted or a plurality of privileges may be granted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko having a specific area 39 as a variable probability operation opening (so-called "V accuracy machine") to which the present invention is applied is exemplified, but not limited to this, a specific area in the large winning opening 39, and determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the result of special symbol suitability determination (type of jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed) (so-called "symbol probability variable machine"). However, the present invention is applicable. Alternatively, the present invention can also be applied to a type of gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function. In addition, a specific area (V area) is provided in the large winning opening that can enter the ball when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, and the game ball that enters the big winning opening during the small winning game It is also possible to apply the present invention to a one- and two-type pachinko machine in which a jackpot game is executed when a specific area is passed (V pass), and a jackpot game is executed based on the V pass.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, control processing (so-called special figure 2 Priority fluctuation) was adopted, but not limited to this, it may be a control process (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation) that preferentially digests the first special figure reservation to the second special figure reservation. Alternatively, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested first Control processing (so-called ball entry order (memory order) change) control processing may be used. Also, instead of the special figure 2 priority variation in the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display (digestion of the first special symbol reservation and digestion of the second special symbol reservation) Control processing to be executed in parallel (so-called special figure 1, 2 simultaneous variation) may be adopted.

[others]
Further, as a reference invention of the gaming machine described above, the following may be adopted.
(Reference Invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game mode transition means capable of transitioning the game mode;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect corresponding to the game mode being executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
The game modes include at least a first game mode and a second game mode,
The game effects include at least a first game effect and a second game effect different from the first game effect,
The first game effect is executable in the first game mode and unexecutable in the second game mode,
The second game effect is executable in the second game mode and in the first game mode when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with a game mode shift means capable of shifting the game mode, and a game effect execution means capable of executing a game effect corresponding to the game mode being executed. In addition, as game modes, it has at least a first game mode and a second game mode, and as game effects, it has at least a first game effect and a second game effect different from the first game effect. there is The first game effect can be executed in the first game mode but cannot be executed in the second game mode, and the second game effect can be executed in the second game mode and in the first game mode when the specific condition is satisfied. It is said that

As a result, the first game effect is executed in the first game mode, and the second game effect is executed in the second game mode. By making the game performance executable, it is possible to provide a game performance with unexpectedness and increase the interest in the game. In addition, as the first game mode and the second game mode, for example, the background effect of the display unit may be different, a game mode display unit may be provided to inform the game mode, and the name of the game mode may be different. The game mode being executed by the player may be recognized by displaying different characters depending on the mode.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The second game effect is a game effect that can be executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays of the identification information,
The game mode transition means can shift the game mode from the second game mode to the first game mode,
The specific condition is characterized by being met at least when the second game effect started in the second game mode continues to be executed even after shifting from the second game mode to the first game mode. and

According to such a gaming machine, the second game effect is a game effect that can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information. Then, when the specific condition for enabling execution of the second game effect in the first game mode is to shift from the second game mode to the first game mode, the second game effect started in the second game mode is changed to the first game mode. It shall be established when it continues to be executed even after the transition to the game mode. As a result, the second game effect can be executed even in the first game mode, and the game amusement can be enhanced by the execution of the unexpected game effect. Further, as a result, it is possible to continuously execute the game effect (second game effect) that has been determined to be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information without being interrupted by the transition of the game mode. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game performance without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
Only the second game effect that is continuously executed from the second game mode to the first game mode can be executed in the first game mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game mode shifts from the second game mode to the first game mode, the second game effect starts from the second game mode and continues to the first game mode. Only when it is executed, it is possible to execute the second game effect in the first game mode. Therefore, when the second game effect executed in the first game mode ends, the second game effect is not executed in the first game mode. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by interrupting the game effect (second game effect) being executed over several times of variable display of the identification information.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3,
Pre-determining means for determining in advance whether the result of the variable display of the specific identification information is the specific result before the start of the variable display of the specific identification information,
The second game effect is executed at least in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information, so that the result of the preliminary determination related to the variable display of the specific identification information is It is a game performance to notify,
The specific condition is a case where the second game effect started in the second game mode is not finished when the second game mode is shifted to the first game mode, and the specific identification information is established when the result of the preliminary determination relating to the variable display of (1) satisfies the second specific condition.

According to such a gaming machine, the pre-determining means for pre-determining the result of the variable display of the specific identification information is provided, the second game effect is a game effect capable of informing the result of the pre-determination, and the specific condition is pre-determined. It shall be established when the determination result satisfies the second specific condition. Thereby, depending on the result of the preliminary determination (depending on whether the second specific condition is satisfied), it is determined whether or not to continue the second game effect being executed in the second game mode even after shifting to the first game mode. becomes possible. Further, this makes it possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation when the second game effect is executed in the first game mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4,
When the second game effect started in the second game mode is not finished when the second game mode is shifted to the first game mode, and the specific identification information is changed and displayed. If the result of the preliminary determination satisfies the second specific condition, the second game effect is continuously executed in the first game mode,
When the second game effect started in the second game mode is not finished when the second game mode is shifted to the first game mode, and the specific identification information is changed and displayed. When the result of the preliminary determination does not satisfy the second specific condition, the second game effect is terminated with the transition to the first game mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the second game effect that has not been completed when shifting from the second game mode to the first game mode is determined as a result of the preliminary determination related to the variable display of the specific identification information. When the conditions are satisfied, the first game mode is continuously executed, and when the result of the preliminary determination does not satisfy the second specific condition, the game is terminated with the transition to the first game mode. As a result, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player when the second game effect is executed in the first game mode, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4,
When the second game effect started in the second game mode is not finished when the second game mode is shifted to the first game mode, and the specific identification information is changed and displayed. If the result of the preliminary determination satisfies the second specific condition, the second game effect is continuously executed in the first game mode,
When the second game effect started in the second game mode is not finished when the second game mode is shifted to the first game mode, and the specific identification information is changed and displayed. When the result of the preliminary determination does not satisfy the second specific condition, the second game effect is switched to the first game effect in accordance with the transition to the first game mode and executed. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the second game effect that has not been completed when shifting from the second game mode to the first game mode is determined as a result of the preliminary determination related to the variable display of the specific identification information. If the conditions are met, the game is continued in the first game mode. Then, when the result of the preliminary determination does not satisfy the second specific condition, the second game effect is switched to the first game effect and executed with the transition to the first game mode. As a result, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player when the second game effect is executed in the first game mode, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a count display unit that displays a predetermined count value;
count effect execution means capable of executing a count effect that changes the count value displayed on the count display unit as the game progresses;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
Having at least a first game effect as the game effect,
When the count effect is executed, the first game effect is executed when a specific count value is displayed on the count display portion, and the first game effect is executed when the specific count value is not displayed on the count display portion. It is characterized in that the game presentation is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a count display section that displays a predetermined count value and a count effect that changes (progresses) the count value displayed on the count display section as the game progresses. and a count effect executing means, for executing the first game effect when the count effect is executed and the specific count value is displayed, and when the specific count value is not displayed, the first game effect is executed. shall not be executed. As a result, whether or not the first game effect is to be executed is indicated by whether or not a specific count value is displayed based on the progress of the count effect. Expecting the value to be displayed, it is possible to increase the amusement of the game.

Here, "changes as the game progresses" includes cases where the displayed count value changes as the game effect progresses, cases where the count value changes with the passage of time, and the like. Also, "the count value changes" may be a count-up method in which the displayed count value counts up, a count-down method in which the count value is counted down, or a random method in which the displayed count value changes randomly. Also, both the game effect execution means and the count effect execution means are constituted by the CPU of the sub-control section. In addition, the game effects include a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, a effect (symbol variation effect) showing a judgment result such as a big hit, and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
A game effect information display unit for displaying game effect information indicating a predetermined game effect,
Having at least a second game effect as the game effect,
The game effect information includes at least first game effect information indicating the first game effect and second game effect information indicating the second game effect,
When the first game effect information is displayed on the game effect information display portion and the count effect is executed, the first game effect is executed when the specific count value is displayed on the count display portion. , the first game effect is not executed unless the specific count value is displayed on the count display unit;
When the second game effect information is displayed on the game effect information display portion and the count effect is executed, the second game effect is executed when the specific count value is displayed on the count display portion. The second game effect is not executed unless the specific count value is displayed on the count display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include at least the first game effect and the second game effect. It has at least game performance information and second game performance information indicating a second game performance. When the first game effect information is displayed on the game effect information display portion and a specific count value is displayed on the count display portion, the first game effect is executed, and when the specific count value is not displayed, the first game effect is executed. is not executed. Further, when the second game effect information is displayed in the game effect information display portion and a specific count value is displayed in the count display portion, the second game effect is executed, and when the specific count value is not displayed, the second game effect is executed. is assumed not to be executed.

According to this, whether or not the game effect indicated by the display on the game effect information display section is executed is indicated by whether or not the specific count value is displayed by the count effect. As a result, if the game effect displayed on the game effect information display section is highly interesting or increases the expectation of a special game or the like, the player can pay attention to the progress of the count effect, Expecting that a specific count value will be displayed in the count effect, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

As a result of the execution of the count effect, when a specific count value is displayed on the count display part, the game effect displayed on the game effect information display part is executed, and as a result of the execution of the count effect, the specific count value is displayed. If not, the game effect is not executed. In addition, "count effect" refers to a effect in which a predetermined count value is displayed on the count display unit, and the count value is displayed by subtraction, addition, or stop display to change (including stop). .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
Provided with input means for the player to perform a predetermined input,
The count effect is characterized by having a first input effect of displaying the specific count value on the count display section in conjunction with an input to the input means.

According to such a gaming machine, an input means is provided for a player to make a predetermined input, and a specific count value is displayed based on the input to the input means in a count effect accompanying the input to the input means. have a performance. As a result, the player can increase his or her motivation for the input act and increase the interest in the game when the first input effect is generated, because the player is related to whether or not the specific count value is displayed by the input to the input means. It becomes possible. Also, in the count effect, instead of simply waiting for the passage of time to see if a specific count value is displayed, it is possible to display a specific count value by your own input act, so it is noticeable It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 or Reference Invention 2-3,
Provided with input means for the player to perform a predetermined input,
It is characterized by having a second input effect of displaying game effect information on the game effect information display section based on an input to the input means.

According to such a gaming machine, the input means is provided for the player to make a predetermined input, and the second input effect is provided for displaying the game effect information on the game effect information display section based on the input to the input means. . Thus, based on the input to the input means, it has an effect of displaying a game effect that is executed when a specific count value is displayed. As a result, the player is notified of the game performance that can be executed by the player by inputting to the input means, so that the motivation for the input action can be increased and the game interest can be enhanced when the first input performance is generated. Further, it is possible to select whether or not to display the game performance information on the game performance information display section depending on whether or not to perform an input to the input means, so that the game performance can be diversified.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
In the second input effect, if the input to the input means is not detected, the game effect information is not displayed in the game effect information display section until at least the specific count value is displayed in the count effect, and the input is performed. When an input to the means is detected, the game effect information is displayed on the game effect information display section before the specific count value is displayed in the count effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second input effect for displaying the game effect information that can be executed, if no input is made to the input means, the game effect information is displayed at least until the specific count value is displayed. do not display That is, when the specific count value is not displayed in the count effect, the game effect information remains undisplayed. Further, when an input is made to the input means, before the specific count value is displayed, game effect information indicating a game effect that can be executed when the specific count value is displayed is displayed. As a result, while the effect of whether or not the specific count value is displayed is being executed in the count effect, before it is determined whether or not the specific count value is displayed, the game effect that can be executed is displayed. A player who wants to know inputs to the input means, and a player who does not want to know the game effect to be executed (or can be executed) until a specific count value is displayed (or even if it is displayed) inputs to the input means. It is possible to make a game selection such as not to input to. This makes it possible to diversify the game and increase the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 3)
In addition, the game machine of Reference invention 3-1 invention is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a count display unit that displays a predetermined count value;
count effect execution means capable of executing a count effect that changes the count value displayed on the count display unit as the game progresses;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
As the game effect, having a specific game effect that can be executed along with the count effect,
As the count production,
An effect consisting of a count stop effect for stopping the change in the count value in the count effect, and a count restart effect for restarting the change in the count value after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the stop,
The specific game effect can be continuously executed even during execution of the count stop effect.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a count display section that displays a predetermined count value and a count effect that changes (progresses) the count value displayed on the count display section as the game progresses. and a count effect executing means. In addition, as the count effect, it has a count stop effect of stopping the change (progress) of the displayed count value and a count restart effect of starting the change (progress) of the count value again after the stop. . The specific game effect that can be executed along with the count effect can be continuously executed both during the period during which the count value is changed (progressed) and during the execution period of the count stop effect.

As a result, when the count stop effect is executed during the count effect, the execution period of the specific game effect is lengthened, and a highly interesting game effect can be executed. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, by having the count stop effect and the count restart effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game even when a display indicating that the execution period of the count effect is relatively short is given as the count effect. It becomes possible. As the "specific game effect", for example, a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, a character effect, a effect pattern variation effect, and the like can be mentioned.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
As the count production,
Performing a count stop effect to stop the change of the count value in the count effect, and having an effect not to execute the count restart effect after the stop,
The special game is more likely to be executed when the count restart performance is executed after the count stop performance than when the count restart performance is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as the count effect, the count stop effect for stopping the change in the count value is performed, and after the stop, the count restart effect is not executed (the change in the count value is not restarted). . Then, it is assumed that the execution possibility of the special game is higher when the count restart effect is executed after the count stop effect than when the count restart effect is not executed. Thus, the occurrence of the count effect, the count stop effect, and the count resumption effect can increase the expectation of the player and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
a first count effect in which the execution period of the count effect is a predetermined period; and a second count effect in which the execution period is longer than the first count effect,
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second count effect is executed than when the first count effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as count effects, the first count effect and the second count effect having a longer execution period than the first count effect are provided, and the second count effect is preferably executed. The execution possibility of the special game is assumed to be higher than in the case of executing the first count performance. As a result, the player expects the occurrence of the count effect with a longer execution period, and the count stop effect and the count restart effect are displayed to indicate that the execution period of the count effect is a relatively short period. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in amusement.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2,
a first count effect in which the execution period of the count effect is a predetermined period; and a second count effect in which the execution period is longer than the first count effect,
When executing the second count effect, the possibility of executing the special game is higher than when executing the first count effect,
The period during which the second count effect is executed includes the period during which the count stop effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as count effects, the first count effect and the second count effect having a longer execution period than the first count effect are provided, and the second count effect is preferably executed. The execution possibility of the special game is assumed to be higher than in the case of executing the first count performance. In addition, since the second count effect, which has a relatively long execution period and a relatively high possibility of executing a special game, includes at least a count stop effect, the player can generate a count effect with a longer execution period. As well as anticipating the occurrence of the count stop effect, it is possible to increase the amusement of the game. Further, this makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game even when a display is made indicating that the execution period of the count effect is a relatively short period.

(Reference invention 4)
In the case of a game machine equipped with a conventional notice effect or advance notice effect, the result of the variable display of the pattern (the result of the judgment of success or failure) is recognized by the game effect executed during the variable display or during the previous variable display. This makes it possible to raise expectations for a big win over a long period of time and to raise expectations for a big win at an unexpected timing. However, when a notice effect or advance notice effect with low reliability of a big hit appears, it is difficult for the player to raise expectations for the result of the variable display of symbols (result of winning/failing judgment) shown after that. becomes. Moreover, there is also a possibility that this may reduce the interest in the game.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that maintains a player's interest in the game for a long period of time and enhances the interest in the game by means of effects such as advance notice effects and advance notice effects. is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
a pre-rendering effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, which is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information prior to the variable display of the specific identification information;
an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, the specific effect being executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information;
Having a first production as the preliminary production,
Having a second effect as the specific effect,
The second effect may be executed through the first effect or may be executed without the first effect.

According to such a gaming machine, a pre-rendering that is an effect showing the contents of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information. and a specific effect that is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information. Also, the second effect as the specific effect has a case where it is executed via the first effect as a preliminary effect and a case where it is executed without going through the first effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the second performance and enhance the interest in the game whether the preliminary performance is generated or not.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
Having a third effect as the specific effect,
When the second effect is executed without going through the first effect, the second effect is executed through the third effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect is executed via the first effect as the preliminary effect and the case where it is executed via the third effect as the specific effect. and As a result, the player expects the first performance to occur in a situation where the preliminary performance can be executed, and expects the third performance to occur in a situation where the specific performance can be executed. It is possible to enhance the game interest in a difficult game situation.

Further, a driving source capable of operating a predetermined movable portion may be provided, and the third effect may be a movable effect of operating the movable portion in a predetermined operation mode. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation. Also, the first effect may be a display effect displayed in a predetermined display mode on the display section. As a result, the performance targets of the first performance as a pre-performance that triggers the execution of the second performance and the third performance as a specific performance (the relevant performance) are made different, and the player is asked which performance (pre-performance or It is possible to recognize whether it occurred due to a specific effect). Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2,
The execution possibility of the second effect is higher when the first effect is executed than when the first effect is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the execution possibility of the second effect is higher when the first effect is executed than when the first effect is not executed. As a result, the player expects the occurrence of the first performance as a pre-performance, and expects the occurrence of the second performance when the first performance occurs, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3,
The first effect is characterized in that it can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first effect is an effect executed over a plurality of times of variable display. As a result, by executing the first effect using the variable display a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting effect, and to increase and maintain the game interest over a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-4,
Acquired information storage means for storing acquired information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether to execute the first effect before starting the variable display of the specific identification information,
The prior determination means determines whether or not to execute the first effect when the number of (undigested) acquired information (reserved information) stored in the acquired information storage means is a predetermined number of two or more. It is characterized by making a prior determination.

According to such a gaming machine, the prior determination means executes the first effect as a preliminary effect when the number of acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means is a predetermined number (a plurality of pieces) of two or more. It shall be determined in advance whether As a result, the player plays a game in such a manner that a large amount of obtained information is stored in the obtained information storage means, and a state in which a large amount of information is stored is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game (for example, stopping the game) and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. Further, by making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the first effect only when the acquired information is plural, it is possible to perform the preliminary effect using the variable display a plurality of times, thereby making the first effect more interesting. It is possible to achieve a game performance with a high value.

Acquisition information storage means for storing acquisition information is acquisition information storage means (hold information storage means) for storing undigested acquisition information (so-called hold information) for which variable display of identification information (special symbols) has not started. may be In addition, a first acquisition information storage means (hold information storage means) for storing undigested acquisition information (so-called hold information), and a second for storing acquisition information related to the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) currently being executed 2 acquired information storage means may be combined as an acquired information storage means.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, in a gaming machine having a variety of game effects, the game machine maintains the game interest of the player for a long period of time and enhances the game interest by game effects such as advance notice effects and advance notice effects. It will be possible to provide

(Reference Invention 5)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Acquired information storage means for storing acquired information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the acquired information;
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute a preliminary effect before starting the variable display of the specific identification information;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specified result;
A gaming machine comprising
The preliminary effect is a effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, and is a effect executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information,
Having a first production as the preliminary production,
The prior determination means executes a prior determination as to whether or not to execute the first effect when the number of acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and stores It is characterized in that, when the number of pieces of acquired information stored is less than a predetermined number, the preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the first effect is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it has acquisition information storage means for storing acquisition information, and preliminary determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute a predetermined preliminary effect. Further, the pre-production is a production showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, and is a production executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information. Then, when the number of acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the preliminary determination means performs a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the first performance as a preliminary performance, and when the number is less than the predetermined number, It is assumed that no prior determination is made as to whether or not to execute the first effect.

As a result, the player plays a game in such a manner that a large amount of obtained information is stored in the obtained information storage means, and a state in which a large amount of information is stored is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game (for example, stopping the game) and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. Further, by making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the first effect only when the acquired information is plural, it is possible to perform the preliminary effect using the variable display a plurality of times, thereby making the first effect more interesting. It is possible to achieve a game performance with a high value. In addition, the number of stored pieces of acquired information makes it possible to diversify the situations in which the pre-performance is generated, prevent players from becoming bored with the game, and increase the interest in the game.

Also, the identification information is variably displayed based on the acquired information (determination result) stored in the acquired information storage means. Further, the pre-determination means pre-determines based on the information (acquisition data) acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the acquisition information (suspension information storage means) stored in the acquisition information storage means (suspension information storage means). ), or based on information for prior determination (acquired data) different from the acquired information (holding information).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The first effect is characterized in that it can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first effect is an effect executed over a plurality of times of variable display. As a result, by executing the first effect using the variable display a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting effect, and to increase and maintain the game interest over a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
An effect indicating the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, comprising a specific effect executed along with the variable display of the specific identification information,
Having a second effect as the specific effect,
The second effect may be executed after the first effect, or may be executed without the first effect.

According to such a gaming machine, a pre-rendering that is an effect showing the contents of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information. and a specific effect that is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information. Also, the second effect as the specific effect has a case where it is executed via the first effect as a preliminary effect and a case where it is executed without going through the first effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the second performance and enhance the interest in the game whether the preliminary performance is generated or not.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3,
Having a third effect as the specific effect,
When the second effect is executed without going through the first effect, the second effect is executed through the third effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect is executed via the first effect as the preliminary effect and the case where it is executed via the third effect as the specific effect. and As a result, the player expects the first performance to occur in a situation where the preliminary performance can be executed, and expects the third performance to occur in a situation where the specific performance can be executed. It is possible to enhance the game interest in a difficult game situation.

In addition, the gaming machine of another reference invention is
Acquired information storage means for storing acquired information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the acquired information;
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute a preliminary effect before starting the variable display of the specific identification information;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specified result;
A gaming machine comprising
The preliminary effect is a effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, and is a effect executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information,
Having a first production as the preliminary production,
The determination condition for executing the preliminary determination whether the preliminary determination means executes the first effect is at least the number of acquired information (pending information) stored (undigested) in the acquired information storage means. It may be characterized in that it is a predetermined number of two or more.

(Reference invention 6)
In addition, the game machine of Reference invention 6-1 invention is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
a pre-rendering effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, which is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information prior to the variable display of the specific identification information;
an effect indicating the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, the specific effect being executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information;
Having a first production as the preliminary production,
Having a second effect as the specific effect,
The first effect is a effect indicating whether or not the second effect is to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a pre-rendering that is an effect showing the contents of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information. and a specific effect that is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information. Further, the first effect as the preliminary effect is a effect indicating whether or not the first effect as the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information. As a result, the player can recognize the game effect to be executed in the subsequent variable display of the identification information in the preliminary effect, and can maintain a high level of interest in the game over a long period of time. In addition, even if it is indicated in the preliminary performance that the second performance will not be executed in the subsequent variable display of the identification information, the game performance other than the second performance can be executed, which reduces the interest in the game. Nor do I let you.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The first effect is characterized in that it can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first effect is an effect executed over a plurality of times of variable display. As a result, by executing the first effect using the variable display a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting effect, and to increase and maintain the game interest over a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The first effect does not indicate the possibility of execution of the special game, and is characterized in that it is an effect indicating whether or not the second effect is to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first effect as the preliminary effect is a effect indicating whether or not the first effect as the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information. It is a production that does not show feasibility. As a result, even if it is indicated that the second effect will not be executed or that the second effect will be executed in the subsequent variable display of the identification information in the preliminary effect, Since the second effect does not indicate the feasibility of executing the special game, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the expectation for the variable display of the identification information thereafter from being lowered.

In addition, for example, when a pre-performance that indicates low reliability (for example, change of hold) is executed, although the pre-performance is executed, this results in a variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pre-performance. It is not possible to raise expectations for (results of success/failure determination), which may reduce the interest in the game. In addition, if it is indicated that the highly reliable performance (notice performance) will not be executed by the pre-performance, similarly, the result of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pre-performance (result of judgment) The anticipation cannot be increased, and the amusement of the game can be lowered. In addition, in the second effect (specific effect), the effect (first notice effect) indicating a predetermined possibility as the execution possibility of the special game and the effect (first notice effect) indicating a higher possibility than the effect (first notice effect) a second notice effect), indicating whether or not the second notice effect is to be executed before the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, and whether the first notice effect is executed or not. Whether or not it is executed shall be indicated during the change display of the specific identification information (during the change). As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating before the start of the variable display of the specific identification information due to the preliminary effect (first effect).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3,
The second effect is characterized in that it is a effect indicating the possibility of execution of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect indicates the possibility of executing a special game. Thus, the first performance, which is a pre-performance, indicates whether or not the second performance will be executed without indicating the possibility of execution of the special game, and the second performance, which is a specific performance, indicates that the specific identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to indicate the feasibility of the special game (during the fluctuation). In addition, thereby, it is possible to prevent the game interest from declining before the start of the variable display of the specific identification information by the pre-performance (first effect), and to maintain the high game interest for a long period of time. . In addition, as the second effect (specific effect), the effect (first notice effect) indicating a predetermined possibility as the execution possibility of the special game, and the effect (first notice effect) indicating a higher possibility than the effect (first notice effect) 2 advance notice effect), and may be provided at least.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4,
Acquired information storage means for storing acquired information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a memory pattern display unit capable of displaying a memory pattern corresponding to each of the obtained information stored in the obtained information storage means;
A first effect display unit capable of displaying the first effect,
The first effect display unit is provided in association with a specific memory pattern corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
When the first effect display unit indicates that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information related to the specific memory pattern. be.

According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with a memory pattern display section capable of displaying a memory pattern corresponding to each piece of acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a first effect display section. Also, the first effect display section is provided in association with the memory pattern provided corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information indicating whether or not the second effect is to be executed. When the first effect display unit indicates that the second effect is to be executed (by the first effect), the second effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information associated with the first effect display unit. It shall be. As a result, by looking at the first effect, the player can grasp which of the identification information variable displays is being executed with the advance notice effect. (variable display of specific identification information) can be grasped.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-5,
The second effect may be executed after the first effect, or may be executed without the first effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect has a case where it is executed via the first effect as a preliminary effect and a case where it is executed without going through the first effect. is doing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the second performance and enhance the interest in the game whether the preliminary performance is generated or not.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6,
Having a third effect as the specific effect,
When the second effect is executed without going through the first effect, the second effect is executed through the third effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect is executed via the first effect as the preliminary effect and the case where it is executed via the third effect as the specific effect. and As a result, the player expects the first performance to occur in a situation where the preliminary performance can be executed, and expects the third performance to occur in a situation where the specific performance can be executed. It is possible to enhance the game interest in a difficult game situation.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
a pre-rendering effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, which is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information prior to the variable display of the specific identification information;
an effect indicating the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, the specific effect being executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information;
Having a first production as the preliminary production,
Having a second effect as the specific effect,
The first effect is a effect indicating whether or not to execute the second effect,
When the execution of the second effect is indicated by the first effect, the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the first effect. be.

According to such a gaming machine, a pre-rendering that is an effect showing the contents of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed along with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information. and a specific effect that is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information and that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the specific identification information. Further, the first effect as the preliminary effect is a effect indicating whether or not the first effect as the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information, and indicates that the second effect is to be executed. In this case, the second effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information related to the preliminary effect (first effect).

As a result, the player can recognize the game effect to be executed in the subsequent variable display of the identification information in the preliminary effect, and can maintain a high level of interest in the game over a long period of time. In addition, even if it is indicated in the preliminary performance that the second performance will not be executed in the subsequent variable display of the identification information, the game performance other than the second performance can be executed, which reduces the interest in the game. Nor do I let you. In addition, as a result, by looking at the first effect, the player can grasp which of the identification information variable displays is being executed with the advance notice effect. It is possible to grasp the variable display of the specific identification information that is displayed).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The first effect is characterized in that it can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first effect is an effect executed over a plurality of times of variable display. As a result, by executing the first effect using the variable display a plurality of times, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting effect, and to increase and maintain the game interest over a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
Acquired information storage means for storing acquired information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a memory pattern display unit capable of displaying a memory pattern corresponding to each of the obtained information stored in the obtained information storage means;
A first effect display unit capable of displaying the first effect,
The first effect display unit is provided in association with a specific memory pattern corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
When the first effect display unit indicates that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information related to the specific memory pattern. be.

According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with a memory pattern display section capable of displaying a memory pattern corresponding to each piece of acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a first effect display section. Also, the first effect display section is provided in association with the memory pattern provided corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information indicating whether or not the second effect is to be executed. When the first effect display unit indicates that the second effect is to be executed (by the first effect), the second effect is executed during the variable display of the specific identification information associated with the first effect display unit. It shall be. As a result, by looking at the first effect, the player can grasp which of the identification information variable displays is being executed with the advance notice effect. (variable display of specific identification information) can be grasped.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3,
The second effect may be executed after the first effect, or may be executed without the first effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect has a case where it is executed via the first effect as a preliminary effect and a case where it is executed without going through the first effect. is doing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the second performance and enhance the interest in the game whether the preliminary performance is generated or not.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4,
Having a third effect as the specific effect,
When the second effect is executed without going through the first effect, the second effect is executed through the third effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect as the specific effect is executed via the first effect as the preliminary effect and the case where it is executed via the third effect as the specific effect. and As a result, the player expects the first performance to occur in a situation where the preliminary performance can be executed, and expects the third performance to occur in a situation where the specific performance can be executed. It is possible to enhance the game interest in a difficult game situation.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the conventional game machine is provided with a game effect using a timer as a game effect to be executed in accordance with the variable display of symbols. According to such a game effect using a timer, the display mode of the game effect changes at a time predetermined by the timer effect regardless of the determination result. As a result, the game performances to be executed diversify (change) as the game time elapses due to the timer performance, and even when the same game machine is played for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game as much as possible. can be done. However, depending on the game effect executed by the timer effect and the time (time) set by the timer effect, the game interest may be increased or the game interest may be decreased. For example, if the time set by the timer effect is long or short, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced.

Reference The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine having a variety of game effects, which executes unexpected game effects and enhances game interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
The game effect includes a count effect of displaying a predetermined initial value and changing the initial value to count up to a specific value,
In the count effect, the displayed value is changed to a value in the direction away from the specific value, and a special effect of counting can be executed.
It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, after displaying a predetermined initial value as a game effect, the game machine has a count effect in which the initial value is changed and counted up to a specific value. Then, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the value displayed in the count effect is changed to a value in the direction away from the specific value (away direction), and then counting is performed. As a result, the displayed initial value is not only counted toward the specific value, but also has an effect of changing the value in the direction away from the specific value. Then, the execution period of the count effect can be changed from the period indicated by the initial value, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, as a result, even if the initial value displayed in the count effect is a low-expectation value, there is a possibility that the value will change after that, so it is possible to maintain the player's high expectations for a long period of time. becomes.

Here, "the value in the direction away from the specific value (initial value, intermediate value)" is assumed to increase the value in the case of the countdown method, and to decrease the value in the case of the countup method. . For example, if the specific value is "0" and the initial value is "10", in the case of a count effect that counts down from "10" to "0", the value displayed in the count effect is "10" to "1". , the displayed value (e.g., "5") changes to a value (e.g., "9", "20", etc.) greater than the value ("5"), An effect of counting again from the value after the change (for example, "9" or "20") toward a specific value is called a special effect.

In addition, depending on the value after the change (for example, "99" or "77"), it is possible to produce a production in which the jackpot is confirmed or a production in which the possibility of a big hit is very high (30% or more, or 50% or more). good.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
By executing the special effect in the count effect, the effect can be executed for a period longer than the period indicated by the initial value.

According to such a gaming machine, by executing a special effect in the count effect (the effect of changing the displayed value to a value in the direction away from the specific value), the count effect is performed for the period indicated by the initial value. Allows it to run for a longer period of time. As a result, even if the period indicated by the initial value in the count effect is short and the expectation is low, by changing the value (initial value or intermediate value) after that, the remaining period of the count effect (remaining value Display period) can be extended, and it will be possible to change to something with high expectations over a long period of time. In addition, as a result, even if the initial value displayed in the count effect is a value with a low expectation, the player's expectation can be maintained high for a long period of time due to the effect of changing the value afterward. Become.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
having at least a first count effect whose execution period of the count effect is a predetermined period and a second count effect whose execution period is longer than that of the first count effect;
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second count effect is executed than when the first count effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first count effect and the second count effect having a longer execution period than the first count effect are provided as the count effect. Then, the second count effect is an effect indicating a higher possibility as the execution possibility of the special game than the first count effect. As a result, the player expects that a special effect (a effect of changing the displayed value to a value away from the specific value) will occur in the count effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-3,
As the game effect, having a specific game effect,
It is characterized in that the count effect and the specific game effect can be executed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific game effect is provided as a game effect, and the specific game effect and the count effect can be executed in parallel. As a result, the game performance can be diversified by the count performance and the specific game performance, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, when the specific game effect and the count effect are executed in parallel, the longer the execution period of the count effect, the longer the specific game effect execution period, which makes it possible to enhance the game interest. The "specific game effects" include game effects such as advance notice effects, ready-to-win effects, character effects, story effects, and effect symbol variation effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4,
At least a first specific game effect in which the execution period of the specific game effect is a predetermined period, and a second specific game effect in which the execution period is longer than the first specific game effect,
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second specific game effect is executed than when the first specific game effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific game effects include at least the first specific game effect and the second specific game effect having a longer execution period than the first specific game effect. Then, the second specific game effect with a longer execution period is an effect that indicates a higher possibility of execution of the special game than the first specific game effect with a shorter execution period. As a result, the player can see that a long-term effect is executed as a count effect that is executed in parallel with the specific game effect, that is, a value indicating a long period is displayed as an initial value, or a special effect is generated. It is possible to expect that the game will last for a long period of time and increase the interest in the game. As a result, even if the initial value indicating the execution period of the first specific game effect is initially displayed by the count effect, the execution (change to) of the second specific game effect is expected, and the It is possible to maintain a high game interest over a long period of time.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a variety of game presentations, which executes unexpected game presentations and enhances amusement in games.

(Reference Invention 9)
In addition, the game machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
The game effect includes a count effect of displaying a predetermined initial value and changing the initial value to count up to a specific value,
In the count effect, it is possible to execute a pause effect that stops counting and starts after a predetermined time has passed.

According to such a gaming machine, after displaying a predetermined initial value as a game effect, the game machine has a count effect in which the initial value is changed and counted up to a specific value. Then, it is possible to execute a temporary stop effect in which counting is stopped in the count effect and counting is started after a predetermined period has elapsed from the stop. As a result, not only the displayed initial value is counted toward a specific value, but also the effect of temporarily stopping the count is provided. Then, it is possible to change the execution period (including the stop period) of the count effect from the period indicated by the initial value, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Further, as a result, even if the initial value displayed in the count effect is a value with low expectation, the execution period (including the stop period) may change after that, so that the player's expectation can be prolonged. It can be maintained high for a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
having at least a first count effect whose execution period of the count effect is a predetermined period and a second count effect whose execution period is longer than that of the first count effect;
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second count effect is executed than when the first count effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first count effect and the second count effect having a longer execution period than the first count effect are provided as the count effect. Then, the second count effect is an effect indicating a higher possibility as the execution possibility of the special game than the first count effect. As a result, the player expects that a special effect (a effect of changing the displayed value to a value away from the specific value) will occur in the count effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
As the game effect, having a specific game effect,
When the count performance and the specific game performance are executed in parallel and the pause performance is executed in the count performance, the specific game performance is progressed during execution of the pause performance. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, a specific game effect is provided as a game effect, and the specific game effect and the count effect can be executed in parallel. Further, when the pause effect is executed in the count effect, the specific game effect is to proceed even during the pause effect. As a result, the game performance can be diversified by the count performance and the specific game performance, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Also, when the specific game effect and the count effect are executed in parallel, the execution period of the specific game effect is longer if the execution period of the count effect is longer (that is, if the count effect is prolonged by the temporary stop effect). also becomes longer, and it is possible to increase the amusement of the game. The "specific game effects" include game effects such as advance notice effects, ready-to-win effects, character effects, story effects, and effect symbol variation effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3,
At least a first specific game effect in which the execution period of the specific game effect is a predetermined period, and a second specific game effect in which the execution period is longer than the first specific game effect,
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second specific game effect is executed than when the first specific game effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific game effects include at least the first specific game effect and the second specific game effect having a longer execution period than the first specific game effect. Then, the second specific game effect with a longer execution period is an effect that indicates a higher possibility of execution of the special game than the first specific game effect with a shorter execution period. As a result, the player can see that a long-term effect is executed as a count effect that is executed in parallel with the specific game effect, that is, a value indicating a long period is displayed as an initial value, or a special effect is generated. It is possible to expect that the game will last for a long period of time and increase the interest in the game. As a result, even if the initial value indicating the execution period of the first specific game effect is initially displayed by the count effect, the execution (change to) of the second specific game effect is expected, and the It is possible to maintain a high game interest over a long period of time.

In addition, as a gaming machine of another reference invention,
a count value display unit that displays a predetermined value (count value); and count effect execution means that can execute a count effect that changes the value (count value) displayed on the count value display unit as the game progresses. , may be provided. Also, the longer the execution period of the entire count effect is, the higher the reliability of the big win may be, or the longer the period of the count stop effect (stop period) is, the higher the reliability of the big win may be.

In addition, as the count effect, a count stop effect is performed to stop the count in the count effect, and after the stop, the count is not restarted (the change in the count value is not restarted).
The possibility of executing the special game may be higher when the count is restarted after the count stop effect than when the count is not restarted.

In addition, it has a first count effect whose execution period of the count effect is a predetermined period and a second count effect whose execution period is longer than the first count effect,
When the second count effect is executed, the possibility of executing the special game is higher than when the first count effect is executed,
The execution period of the second count effect may include the execution period of the count stop effect.

In addition, the count effect may have a first count mode in which the count is performed at regular intervals (clocking), and a second count mode in which the count interval (count timing: early/late) is different from the first count mode. Also, the counting speed (counting mode) may be changed.

In addition, a first specific game effect (training effect) that is executed until the value in the count effect reaches a specific value, and a second specific game effect (race effect) that is executed after reaching the specific value (after the end of the count effect) ), and a longer execution period of the first specific game effect indicates a higher possibility of execution of the special game than a short execution period. Further, it may have a specific game effect display portion for displaying a specific game effect and a count effect display portion for displaying a count effect.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game area 7 image display device 7a display screen 7b production pattern display area 7c background display area 8 production pattern 9a first production suspension 9b second production suspension 9c 1st effect pending display area (1st effect pending display part), 9d 2nd effect pending display area (2nd effect pending display part), 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 30 1st big winning opening , 35 second big winning port, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 main control board (main control unit, game control means), 81 game control microcomputer (main control unit, game control means), 90 sub control board (sub control unit, effect control means), 91 effect control microcomputer (sub control unit, effect control means), 100 image Control board (image control unit, effect control means), 101 image control microcomputer (image control unit, effect control means).

Claims (1)

identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, the game machine comprising:
As the game performance,
A count effect that displays a predetermined initial value and counts up to a specific value by changing the initial value ;
a specific game effect that is executed in parallel with the count effect until the value displayed in the count effect reaches the specific value, and performs a gauge accumulation effect;
an effect different from the specific game effect, and a purpose effect of performing a predetermined effect based on the gauge amount acquired in the specific game effect after the specific game effect ends ,
When the amount of the gauge accumulated in the specific game effect is large, the possibility of executing the effect indicating the execution of the special game in the purpose effect is higher than in the case where the amount is small,
As the count effect, there are a effect of stopping counting at a value different from the specific value and restarting counting after a predetermined time elapses, and an effect of not restarting counting after stopping counting at a value different from the specific value. ,
In the count effect, when the count is restarted after the count is stopped, the possibility of executing the special game is higher than when the count is not restarted ,
In the count effect, progressing the specific game effect while the count is stopped
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images